DAS CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS For DAS OWNED FACILITIES
March 2019
PUBLISHED BY STATE OF OREGON DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES ENTERPRISE ASSET MANAGEMENT PLANNING AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT DIVISION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 1 - General Requirements 01001 Basic Requirements 01002 Submittals 01003 Special Procedures 01004 Temporary Facilities and Controls
Division 2 - Site Work 02630 Storm Drainage 02900 Landscaping
Division 3 - Concrete 03521 Lightweight Insulating Concrete 03540 Cementitious Underlayment
Division 4 - Masonry 04901 Brick and Stone Masonry & Repointing of Mortar
Division 5 - Metals 05120 Structural Steel 05500 Metal Fabrications 05520 Handrails and Railings 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing
Division 6 - Wood and Plastic 06200 Finish Carpentry
Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07141 Hot Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 07142 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 07210 Thermal Insulation 07550 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07840 Firestopping 07900 Joint Sealers
Division 8 - Doors and Windows 08109 Doors-Frames-Door Hardware
Division 9 - Finishes 09111 Non-Load-Bearing Metal Framing System 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09900 Paints and Coatings
Division 10 - Specialties 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10171 Toilet Compartments & Urinal Screens 10260 Wall and Corner Guards 10270 Access Flooring 10440 Building Signage 10523 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 10900 Custodial Requirements
Division 11 - Equipment 11005 Fall Protection Systems
Division 12 - Furnishings 12005 Office Landscape Furniture 12486 Floor Mats
Division 13 - Special Construction NOT USED
Division 14 - Conveying Systems 14245 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
Division 15 - Mechanical 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 15100 Plumbing Piping and Pumps
Division 16 - Electrical 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16725 Security 16780 DAS Lighting Standards
Division 16 – Electrical – continued; 16785 DAS Pre - Approved Light Fixture Lists 16790 DAS Pre – Approved Lighting Controls 16795 Emergency and Standby Power systems
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 01001 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS See the current editions of the DAS General (non-alterable) Conditions and Supplementary (alterable for project specific requirements).
STANDARDS Modifications to DAS-owned or DAS-operated buildings shall: Support existing building services, structures, and systems; Conform to applicable codes and be safe for occupants; Be cost effective in design, construction, installation, maintenance, and operation. For these reasons, DAS maintains and requires conformance by its Contractors to standards that meet or exceed state and local minimum codes.
PERMITS Permits shall be obtained for all work performed as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. DAS shall receive copies of all permits and copies of all plan review and permit correspondence.
O & M MANUALS Hard and electronic copies (in PDF format) are required. Submit one (1) copy to Owner’s Representative for review and approval. Upon approval by Owner’s Representative, submit hard copies and electronic copies on CD to Owners’ Representative as follows: Three (3) hard copies to Owner’s Representative. Optional hard and electronic copies to the design firm of record. Optional hard and electronic copies should be retain by Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS POTENTIAL PRODUCTS
Some of the specific products referenced in the following divisions are listed only as the “Basis of Design”. The intent of DAS standards and the products mentioned is to set performance standards, not to limit the manufacturers that can be used.
ADDITIONAL POTENTIAL PRODUCTS The following products and Specification are presented because DAS would like to use these products for guidelines in design and construction. It is recognized that individual design consultants engaged for various projects being undertaken will have their own Specification Sections, products, and nomenclature. These will vary from firm to firm and not necessarily reflect what DAS prefers to use. Design consultant Specification Sections, products, and nomenclature shall be reviewed, discussed, and approved by DAS for each individual project.
PART 3 EXECUTION PRODUCT INSTALLATION It should be recognized individual design consultants engaged for various projects being undertaken will have their own Specifications Sections and nomenclature that incorporate execution phases of various Sections. These will vary from firm to firm and not necessarily reflect what DAS prefers to use. Design consultants’ Specification Sections, products, execution protocol, and nomenclature shall be reviewed, discussed, and approved by DAS for each individual project.
END OF SECTION 01001 Basic Requirements
SECTION 01002 SUBMITTALS
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project schedule
B. Schedule of values
C. Product evaluation data
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Manufacturer's product data consist of one or more levels of manufacturer’s information as described below and as requested in the submittal schedule. The three levels of information include: manufacturer's list, manufacturer's catalog data, and manufacturer's technical and engineering data. 1. Manufacturer's List: Manufacturer's list shall include a typewritten list of manufacturer's name, sizes and model or catalog numbers, referenced to the specification section. 2. Manufacturer's Catalog Data: Manufacturer's catalog data shall include standard catalog information marked to indicate specific equipment proposed and point of operation, if appropriate. Include installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's Technical and Engineering Data: Manufacturer's technical and engineering data shall include materials, dimensions, details, installation instructions, weights, capacities, illustrations, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, piping diagrams, connection diagrams, performance data (including performance curves), mix design, and any other information required for a complete and thorough evaluation of the equipment or items specified, and to verify compliance with specifications. Control diagrams or control schematics, where specified and required by the submittal schedule, shall include a detailed schematic of the proposed control modifications and their interface with existing control equipment, where appropriate, and a manufacturer and model number listing of all proposed control components shown on the control schematic.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings are construction drawings of items manufactured specifically for this project. Shop drawings include dimensions, construction details,
weights, and additional information to identify the physical features of the system or piece of equipment.
C. Samples: Samples illustrate functional characteristics of the product with integral parts and attachment devices. Samples shall allow evaluation of full range of manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
Certificates, Test Data or Other Information: Requirements for certificates, test data, or other information will be listed under referenced specification sections.
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. Deliver submittals to Engineer at address listed on title sheet of project manual. Transmit each item by cover letter or with approved transmittal form referencing the project, the Owner, and the Contractor. B. Engineer will require 15 days for review of submittal documents. C. Revise and resubmit. Resubmittals shall be complete substitutions of original submittals unless specifically noted otherwise. D. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. E. Submittal information required in Section 01 33 00 - 1.04 below must be provided regardless of whether the proposed item or work is in exact accordance with the specification requirements. F. No item requiring approved submittal information shall be delivered to the site or installed, or any associated work performed until required submittals have been approved for compliance with the Contract Documents by the Engineer. Any item delivered to the site or installed, or any work performed without an approved submittal, which is deficient in any way, shall be removed from the site without expense to the Owner.
1.04 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Project Schedule: 1. A progress schedule for the proposed work, as outlined in the General Conditions and specified hereunder, shall be prepared and submitted for review. 2. Coordination: Contractor shall meet with Owner's representatives prior to preparing schedule to ascertain specific Owner scheduling requirements. 3. Submit three (3) copies of completed schedule for review. Upon Engineer's signed approval work may commence. 4. Format: Horizontal bar chart or CPM format at Contractor's option. a. Provide a separate time bar for work in each building in the contract. Provide a Continuous vertical line to identify the beginning work day of each week. b. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percent increments. c. Coordinate construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of Subcontractors, submittal schedule, payment requests, and other schedules. d. Indicate substantial completion date.
5. Schedule shall be continually updated. Submit revised schedule with each application for payment.
B. Schedule of Values: 1. A schedule of values for the proposed work, as outlined in the General Conditions and specified hereunder, shall be prepared and submitted for review. 2. Submit three (3) copies of schedule of values for review. 3. Prepare schedule of values using AIA form G703, columns A, B and C. 4. Applications for payment will not be accepted until the schedule of values has been approved by signature of Engineer.
C. Product Evaluation Data
1. Submit product evaluation data within 30 days of contract execution. Multiple submission or submission other than in one complete assembled document is not acceptable except where prior written approval is obtained. Where approval is obtained allowing the Contractor to submit after 30 days, a list of data remaining to be submitted and a date of submittal for each item shall be provided to the Engineer. 2. Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted as follows: a. Submit the number of sets of assembled submittal documents which the Contractor requires, plus three (3) additional sets which will be retained by the Engineer. b. Submittals for manufacturer's product data shall be in sufficient detail to establish conformance with specified requirements. Specific features shall be marked with contrasting ink on printed literature. If translucent highlighting method is used, highlighted print shall be reproducible by photocopy. c. A complete submittal document shall be assembled in one or more three-ring, loose-leaf binders. The complete document shall consist of all items identified in the submittal schedule. d. Order of the bound contents shall be the same as in the submittal schedule. e. Each item or logical group of items shall be identified by a separate tab marker in the bound document (example: "pumps", "air compressors", etc.). f. Each bound document shall contain a Table of Contents which lists each tab and each item under each tab. g. Catalog data (each separate item) shall be identified by the name of the item, the system, the applicable specification paragraph number, drawing number and schedule. 3. Shop drawings shall be submitted as follows: a. Submit the number of sets of shop drawings which the Contractor requires, plus three (3) additional sets which will be retained by the Engineer. b. Submit shop drawings in the form of blue line reproductions. After review by Engineer, Contractor shall make appropriate changes on original, reproduce, and distribute to the necessary parties. c. Minimum scale for shop drawings shall be 1/4" = 1'0" or larger if required for clarity. d. Reinforcement bending and placing submittals prepared in conformance with "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures," ACI
Publication 3.5. 4. Samples shall be submitted as follows: a. Submit two samples unless otherwise specified in individual specification sections. b. Include identification on each sample. 5. Certificates, test data, or other information shall be submitted as detailed in individual specification sections.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 THIS PART NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 THIS PART NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01002 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01003 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Protection of work B. Maintaining systems operational C. Owner access and use D. Noise, dust, and odor control E. Security F. Furnishings to remain in work area
1.02 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect from damage any existing finishes, equipment, and adjacent work which is scheduled to remain.
1.03 MAINTAINING SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL A. All systems currently operating including lighting, HVAC equipment, critical building systems and other systems in use, which serve Owner occupied areas, must be maintained operational during construction. If any system currently in use must be turned off to perform work, permission must be obtained and owner notified prior to performing any work. Shutdown will be required for the following systems: 1. The chilled water system will shut down for winter season Until May 1 st . Contractor to coordinate work so that provisions are installed prior to May 1st that will prevent system shutdown after May 1st. The chilled water system may be shut down for a four hour period during evenings or weekends after May 1st with approval from the Owner’s Authorized Representative.
1.04 OWNER ACCESS AND USE A. Many areas of the facility will be used by the Owner throughout the entire project. The Contractor will maintain these areas fully operational including lighting and HVAC. Areas which must be fully operational during occupied hours throughout the entire project are shown on the drawings. Where necessary to keep areas operational during occupied hours, schedule work during unoccupied hours and weekends.
1.05 NOISE, DUST, AND ODOR CONTROL A. Construction noise and odor must be controlled to allow normal facility use by the Owner. Areas are separated into three classifications as shown on the drawings depending on sensitivity. 1. Areas Which Are Not Sensitive: In areas which are not sensitive, the Contractor may perform any work during occupied or unoccupied hours provided that noise and odor produced by the work is not objectionable in adjacent areas. 2. Areas Where Noise and Odor Must Be Reduced But Not Eliminated: In this area, work may be completed during occupied hours provided that noise and odor levels are reasonable and not objectionable in adjacent spaces. No repetitive high impact noise is permitted. 3. Noise and Odor Sensitive Areas: Construction noise and odor will not be acceptable in sensitive areas when they are occupied. If absolutely necessary, some noise produced in adjacent areas may be acceptable for brief periods with the prior notification and approval of the Owner. 4 Dust resulting from construction must be contained within the work area. Where dust sensitive equipment, such as computers, is present in the work area, cover or otherwise enclose equipment to prevent damage.
1.05 SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to maintain building and site security during construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for all loss or damage from theft or vandalism resulting from inadequate security. B. Back Ground Checks CRIMINAL RECORD CHECK
A Criminal Record Check (CRC) shall be run for each Contractor and Subcontractor’s employees before that employee will be allowed access to Owner premises or be authorized to perform any Work under the Contract. A list of names for all Contractor and all Subcontractor’s employees who will be on the job site for more than one day must be submitted to: Department of Administrative Services, attention: Mr. Bill Miller, 503-373-2318. These employees shall fill out the CRC forms as provided by the Owner and return to Mr. Miller, by mail, common carrier or hand carry. Do not submit completed CRC forms by email or fax. CRCs will be run through the Department of Administrative Services as provided for in ORS 326.603. The Owner shall bear the cost of processing such criminal records checks. Normal processing time is 3-4 business days.
C. The contractor shall allow in his bid, administrative time for the processing of the Criminal Record Check.
D. The Owner shall bear the cost of processing such criminal records checks. Normal processing time is 3-4 business days.
1.06 FURNISHINGS TO REMAIN IN WORK AREA A. Owner will move staff, equipment, and materials to temporary location to facilitate the work as specified in Section 01 10 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK. Items of equipment, Furnishings, and material not required for use by the Owner will remain at their present Locations. Contractor shall take all precautions to protect Owner equipment, furnishings, and other materials left in work space from damage. Contractor is responsible for all damage to Owner equipment, furnishings, and materials resulting from work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 THIS PART NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 THIS PART NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01003 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01004 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Temporary Fire Protection B. Staging Areas and Materials Storage C. Electricity, Lighting D. Heating, Cooling, Ventilation E. Telephone Service F. Water G. Sanitary Facilities H. Construction Aids I. Temporary Roofing J. Enclosures K. Barriers L. Cleaning during Construction M. Parking N. Removal
1.02 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Maintain existing fire protection, fire sprinkler and fire alarm systems in operable condition during construction. B. Provide extensions and temporary systems to maintain specified or existing conditions for fire protection.
1.03 STAGING AREAS AND MATERIALS STORAGE A. Areas for staging and material storage as designated by Owner. B. Materials and equipment stored in accordance with Section 01 60 00. C. Clean and repair any damage caused during staging, handling, and storage of materials. Return areas and existing facilities to specified or original condition.
1.04 ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING A. Connect to existing service; provide branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type power cords. Owner will pay costs of energy used. B. Provide lighting for construction operations. C. Existing and permanent lighting may be used during construction. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs.
1.05 HEATING, COOLING, VENTILATION A. Coordinate use of existing facilities with Owner; extend and supplement with temporary units as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. Owner will pay costs of energy used by existing facilities. Contractor to pay operating costs of temporary portable heaters using fuel sources not available at the site. B. Contractor shall provide a temporary air-cooled water chiller for building cooled during D. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
1.06 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide telephone and directory listing name and business phone number of at least the following: 1. Each contractor and subcontractor 2. Owner 3. Owner's consultants
1.07 WATER A. Connect to existing facilities; extend branch piping with outlets located so that water is available by use of hoses. Owner will pay for water used.
1.08 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Designated existing facilities may be used during construction operations; maintain in sanitary condition.
1.09 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide and operate drainage and pumping equipment; maintain excavations and site free of standing water. B. Designated existing stairs may be used by construction personnel. Coordinate use with Owner.
1.10 ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials to prevent infiltration of rainwater, wind, and other elements, to allow for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
1.11 BARRIERS A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas, to provide for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barricades as required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C. Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials, and puddling or continuous running water.
1.12 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site. Contractor shall provide trash receptacles and pay for servicing. B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.
1.13 PARKING A. On site vehicle parking limited to those areas designated by Owner.
1.14 REMOVAL A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove underground installations to a depth of two feet; grade site as indicated. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specify or to original condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 THIS PART NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 THIS PART NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01004 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This Section includes storm drainage connection point beginning from a point five (5) feet outside of the building perimeter walls or as shown on the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTALS Product Data for the following: Pipe. Fittings. Drains.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Site information: Research public utility records and verify existing utility locations prior to any excavating and ordering any materials. Notify Owners’ Representative immediately if any discrepancies are found in a project survey.
PART 2 PRODUCTS PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings according to the following: PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 4 to NPS 15 (DN50 to DN 375): ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent- cemented or gasketed joints. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
PART 3 EXECUTION EARTHWORK
Excavating, trenching, backfilling, and identification materials and their installation are specified in Specification Section 02300 Earthwork. Arrange for installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. Use detectable warning tape over all piping and over edges of underground structures.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout takes design consideration into account. Install piping as indicated, unless directed otherwise by the Owner’s Representative. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building’s storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated with gasketed caps or plugs securely fastened to withstand test pressures. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fitting as follows: Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. Install according to ASTM D 2321 Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both system materials and dimensions.
DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION Install drains in locations as indicated. Set drain frames and cover elevations with tops flush with finish pavement surface.
Installation and compaction of back fill materials as specified whether granular rock or native materials is to be in maximum 18 inch deep lifts or as specified by the construction documents.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place and again at completion of Project. Defects requiring correction include the following: Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
TESTING If Jurisdiction Having Authority does not have published procedures, perform tests as follows: Gravity Storm Sewerage: Perform air test according to UNI-B-6.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
END OF SECTION SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE
SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING
PART 1 1.1 GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SUMMARY This Section includes minimal requirements for any new landscape installation as/developed by DAS Landscaping. DAS Landscape supervisor should be consulted by the Landscape Architect prior to plan development due to special knowledge regarding localized conditions. DAS Landscape supervisor should be consulted by the Landscape Architect for final plan approval, and reserves the right to “veto” plant location/selection. LICENSING REQUIREMENTS
1) All landscape contracts of any size or scope shall be performed by a licensed Oregon Landscape Contractor. ORS 671.510-760 2) The business entity shall be licensed as a landscape contracting business in Oregon. 3) The business owner or individual managing employee shall be licensed in the category of “All phase” IE: All areas of landscape contracting, including the installation of irrigation and backflow assemblies. 4) Any employee of the landscaping contractor that does not possess an “All phase” landscape license shall be supervised at all times with a person holding the proper license while working on any landscape project. 5) All irrigation backflow installations and repairs shall be backflow tested and be inspected by the local AHJ.
The standards that follow are general, minimal requirements for any new landscape installation. We recognize that each new installation or renovation of an existing landscape will have site-specific variables that must be addressed individually. However, these variables should not be cause to supersede the general standards.
In dealing with individual sites the DAS landscape crew is probably the first resource to look to. They will likely know the most about the conditions, history, etc. of the site. Thus, they should be consulted with prior to a landscape architect actually producing a plan. Final approval of landscape plan should be reviewed by landscape manager/crew.
Equally important, it is the DAS landscape section that will be maintaining the site, or in some rare circumstances, overseeing a contractor who is performing the maintenance. Every step in creating a new landscape--from plant selection to the quality of the installation, will affect how well the on-going maintenance performs over time. A poor design can increase the maintenance time to unrealistic levels. Poor installation of any component of the landscape cannot only increase time spent on maintenance, but money spent on repair or change. Something as seemingly simple as placing incompatible plant species together can create long term maintenance problems. Page 21 of 279
The Landscape crew should have a right to veto plants designed into a place where they will not thrive in a healthy environment, "right plant in the right place". (i.e.: most Rhododendrons fail on a south or west side of a building)
Our most fundamental standard is that in the process of creating desirable and acceptable landscape, consideration should be given, not only to the immediate design and maintenance concerns, but how those concerns change over time with the evolution of the landscape. In short, talk to the people who deal with it every day - the DAS Landscape section.
2.1 DAS LANDSCAPE DESIGN CONCEPTS: A. Designing for the mature landscape as opposed to over-planting which usually requires removal of plants within 2-3 years after planting. B. Include sustainable materials, practices, and design. C. Existing trees and major plants should be preserved in new designs where feasible. D. A replacement value for each tree and each major plant to remain should be made and all interested parties notified in writing prior to commencement of construction. E. Existing trees and major plants to remain should be protected during construction and shall be indicated in plan as “To Remain.” F. Existing trees should be preserved if possible, considering what it will really take to preserve and protect the tree canopy, trunk and especially the roots during the entire construction. Some type of financial or other incentive program should be in place to keep sub-contractors from circumventing protection measures. A financial value of the tree should be made and all parties informed of the tree’s value prior to construction
G. Irrigation systems need to be designed for head to head coverage based on real field applications and not based on manufacturer claimed ideal operating specifications.
H. Irrigation designs are designed to properly water plantings not only when they are new but also provide adequate watering to mature plants. Often after only a year or two of growth, middle row plants are often blocked of water by front line plants in overcrowded plantings.
I. Installation of the landscape has often been rushed and under-funded at the end of the project. The general contractor is under pressure to complete the landscape while the building is under construction and the quality of landscaping suffers. This often times also pressures the landscapers to do work that is inconsistent with recommended landscape procedures. We ask that it be asked and considered that the landscape installation be unencumbered by the construction deadlines and become a separate project or such that has its time line in successful lawns, plants, soils and irrigation.
J. Existing Tree/Plant Protection
K. Preserve and protect plant materials identified on the drawings "To Remain", or otherwise identified as such.
Page 22 of 279
L. Erect semi-permanent barriers at the tree drip line or 5 times the diameter of the tree trunk (whichever is greater) or where directed by a project consulting arborist to keep storage, traffic and other construction operations outside of these barriers. Only landscape preparations and planting work may take place inside these barriers.
M. Work required to take place in the protected zone of trees to remain shall be done in a manner preventing damage to existing plants. A DAS representative should be present for these events.
N. Adjust routes and location of new work in order to prevent or minimize plant disturbance. When utilities or other work needs to be routed inside tree protection zones, boring at a depth below roots should be used. Open trenching of utilities services should be avoided at all cost near protected trees.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. DAS must be given the opportunity to inspect and pre-approve any imported soil on to the site. B. Plant Materials 1. Plants shall be true to ANSI 260.1 "Standard for Nursery Stock". Plants not full and in vigorous healthy condition will be rejected. 2. Plants shall be free of disease, disfiguring knots, sunscald, bark abrasions, wind or frost injury, noxious weed and insect infestations. 3. Container stock should not have been in pot so long as to cause circling roots, root bind, or other problems. 4. Plants stock shall be free of noxious weeds as defined by the Oregon Department of Agriculture.
C. Topsoil 1. Topsoil should be fertile, friable natural sandy loam, surface soil free of subsoil, clay lumps or clods of hard earth, brush, noxious weeds or weed seeds, stumps, roots, sticks or stones or other extraneous material or toxic matter harmful to plant growth in the top 12 inches. D. Soil Amendments: generally mushroom compost or composted organic debris. Other soil amendments need prior approval from the landscape section. E. Irrigation systems: 1. Design for head-to-head coverage based on actual field applications rather than manufacturer estimations. 2. Design systems so middle row plants receive adequate water as all plants grow higher.
Page 23 of 279
PART 3 EXECUTION ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Plant or install materials in fall or spring during normal planting seasons for each type of planting required. B. Planting shall not be permitted during the following conditions: Cold weather - less than 32 degrees F Hot weather - greater than 90 degrees F Wet weather - saturated soil Windy weather - wind velocity greater than 30 mph While building is under construction Prepare soil only when topsoil is not saturated, muddy or frozen.
SOIL PREPARATION To be applied to turf, bed, or any other landscape soil preparation. Do not attempt pre-work when soil is saturated or overly wet. Remove debris (construction or otherwise), rocks, weeds, etc. Thoroughly loosen (till) to a minimum depth of 6". When amendments (i.e. topsoil, humus) are added thoroughly, mix the different media to avoid layering or other problems. For turf areas: before seeding, rake and drag areas. All existing and imported soils should be assessed and should meet the minimum requirements of a 12-inch layer of sandy loam unless otherwise specifically requested. Soils should contain 5% or less rock and other debris per volume. EXISTING TREE/PLANT PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Erect semi-permanent barriers at the tree drip line or 5 times the diameter of the tree trunk (whichever is greater) or where directed by a project consulting arborist to keep storage, traffic and other construction operations outside of these barriers. Only landscape preparations and planting work may take place inside these barriers. B. Work required to take place in the protected zone of trees to remain shall be done in a manner preventing damage to existing plants. A DAS representative should be present for such events. C. Adjust routes and location of new work in order to prevent or minimize tree/plant disturbance. D. When utilities or other work needs to be routed inside tree/plant protection zones, boring at a depth below roots should be used. Open trenching of utilities services should be avoided at all cost near protected trees
Page 24 of 279
PLANTING A. For Trees and Shrubs 1. Dig planting holes for trees 12 inches wider and 6 inches deeper than the size of the root-ball. For shrubs six inches wider and four inches deeper than the root-ball. 2. Dig holes with vertical sides. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of holes. Scarify sides of holes and each plant or tree root-ball with a shovel or other tool to allow interfacing with root-ball soil and existing soil. 3. Dispose of excess subsoil removed from planting sites. Do not spread over planting areas. 4. Assure drainage of planting holes by flooding prior to planting. 5. Remove wire baskets, non- biodegradable burlap or root containers. 6. The soil line should be at the root crown where the base where roots begin to branch. 7. Dispose of excess subsoil removed from planting sites. Do not spread over planting areas.
8. Assure drainage of planting holes by flooding prior to planting.
9. Remove wire baskets (or as much as is possible, without damaging root-ball) and non- biodegradable burlap or root containers.
10. Do not plant too deep or too high. The soil line should be at the root crown where the base where roots begin to branch.
B. Staking and Tying Trees. 1. No staking is necessary for most shrubs and for many conifers and other trees with limbs close to the ground. 2. If the tree is small and able to sway and stay stable in the soil then do not brace. If a tree is staked and tied wires, cables or wires in hosing are unacceptable. Broad bands of soft material are best. Rubber products or belt webbing material is good. Tie the tree to the stake low and loose enough to allow the tree to sway. Metal stakes are not acceptable. Wooden stakes (2" x 2") placed to avoid root damage is good. Consider prevailing wind direction when placing stakes. C. Planting Beds 1. Loosen (till) sub-grade of bed to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones, gravel, sticks, rubbish, construction debris, and other extraneous matter. 2. Place soil amendments, spread evenly, and thoroughly mix (till) to a minimum depth of six inches. 3. Final firmed soil grade should be 1 1/2 inches below adjacent paved areas. D. Turf Installation 1. All lawn areas to be planted shall be cleaned of all weeds and debris prior to any such preparation or grading work. Remove from all planting areas: stones, mortar, concrete, asphalt, rubbish, and any materials harmful to plant life.
Page 25 of 279
2. Add 2 inches of organic compost and thoroughly mix and pulverize soil to a depth of 6". Immediately before seeding, rake and drag to remove stones, clods, sticks, and other foreign matter larger than 3/4" in largest dimension from top 1" of soil. Establish smooth, fine- textured seedbed. Assure bed areas are firmed and settled prior to seeding. 3. Finish grade of lawn areas shall be 1/2" below all paving, curbs, and sloped away from building. 4. Type and variety of seed would be site specific as recommended by landscape crew at a rate of 10 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Sow seed by spreader or seeding machine with wind not exceeding 5 mph. 5. Lawns planted after September 30th should be installed as sod and not by seed. Temperatures and fall leaves make establishing a good lawn difficult after this date. If seed is still preferred it should be scheduled for after March 15th of the following year.
END OF SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING
Page 26 of 279
SECTION 03521 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This Section includes cast-in-place vermiculite aggregate-type lightweight insulating concrete, complete with stepped insulation units for resulting tapered substrate for roofing.
DEFINITIONS Lightweight insulating concrete: Low-density concrete, with an oven-dry unit weight not exceeding 50 pounds per cubic foot, placed with or without embedded rigid insulation board.
SUBMITTALS Material Test Reports: For lightweight aggregates, from a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS DESIGN MIX Prepare design mix for each type and strength of lightweight insulating concrete by laboratory trial batch method or by field-test data methods. For trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs.
AGGREGAGE LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE Produce lightweight insulating concrete using the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mix.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Ensure all surfaces to receive lightweight insulating concrete are free of oil, grease, dirt, or other foreign substances that would affect proper adhesion and system performance. Clean and correct surfaces scheduled to receive lightweight insulating concrete to a condition acceptable by the system manufacturer. Do not begin placement of the lightweight insulating concrete system until the General Contractor and lightweight insulating concrete contractor have examined surfaces to receive the roof insulation system and determined the surfaces are acceptable.
Page 28 of 279
PREPARATION Verify all curbs, drains, walls, and other roof penetrations are in place and solidly set.
MIXING AND PLACING Mix and place lightweight insulating concrete according to manufacturer’s written instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mixture and loss of air content. Install insulation board according to lightweight insulating concrete manufacturer’s written instructions. Place insulation board in wet, lightweight insulating concrete slurry poured a minimum of ½ inch over the structural substrate. Ensure full contact of insulation board with slurry. Stagger joints and tightly butt insulation boards. Install insulation board in a stair-step configuration with a maximum step-down of 1 inch. Install stepped insulation units to form tapered substrate for roofing materials, with finish slopes as follows: Field of Roof: 3/8” per foot. Crickets: 1/4” per foot. Deposit and screed lightweight insulating concrete in a continuous operation until an entire panel or section of roof area is completed. Do not vibrate or work mix except for screeding or floating. Place to depths and slopes indicated. Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions and maintain surface in condition to receive subsequent roofing system. Begin curing operations immediately after placement and air cure for not less than three days according to manufacturer’s written instructions. If ambient temperature falls below 32 degrees F. protect lightweight insulating concrete from freezing and maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer for 72 hours after placement.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: DAS will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION SECTION 03521 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
Page 29 of 279
SECTION 03540 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY This Section includes hydraulic-cement based underlayment used to build large area low-slope floor transition between top of slab and existing historic floor finish. Sections include the following: Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certify in writing that products are compatible. Mockups: Apply hydraulic-cement-based underlayment mockups to demonstrate surface finish, bonding, texture, tolerances and standard of workmanship. Apply mockups approximately 100 sq. ft. in area in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owner’s Representative. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental Conditions Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. Place hydraulic-cement based Underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 degree
Page 32 of 279
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURER Basis of Design: Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right. Comparable products that comply with requirements from one of the following: Ardex. ChemRex/Sonneborn. Conspec, a Dayton Superior Company. Substitutions: Under the provisions of Section 01600.
HYDRAULIC-CEMEMNT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109 M. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel 1/8 to ¼ inch; or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 degree F. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions and application indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates with installer present, for conditions affecting performance. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
Page 33 of 279
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer’s written instruction, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Non-porous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surface according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
APPLICATION General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
APPLICATION Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and innermost adhesion. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, sloping surface from approximately 1-1/2 inch to feather edge. Do not use aggregates for thickness less than ½ inch. Apply a final layer without aggregate to produce surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a “hollow: sound when tapped. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL DAS testing agent will perform the following: Slump Flow Test: Each mixture, 2 inch by 4 inch cylinder filled mixture released to flow on a smooth level surface, shall form 9-1/2 inch, plus or minus 1 inch diameter circle. Compression Test: Mold 3 cube samples from each day’s pour. 3000 psi at 3 days per ASTM C 109. 5000 psi at 28 days. Reserve one. END OF SECTION SECTION 03540 CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT
Page 34 of 279
SECTION 04901 BRICK AND STONE MASONRY & REPOINTING OF MORTAR
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY Section Includes: Masonry products Colored mortar mixes Repointing
REFERENCES ASTM International: ASTM C91 Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland cement. ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. ASTM C780 Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. ASTM C926 Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster. ASTM C979 Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. ASTM C1329 Standard Specification for Mortar Cement. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Design and Performance Requirements: Provide mortar mixes which have been selected, manufactured, mixed and installed to comply with the following: per ASTM C780.
Page 35 of 279
SUBMITTALS General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and General Conditions Submittal Procedures Section. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of colored mortars. Color to match existing mortar for each building or part of building with distinct variation in color. Installer experience: Submit list of at least three recent projects of similar size and complexity. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer with at least five (5) years’ experience on projects of similar size and complexity. Mock-Ups: For each mortar color and building provide a minimum two (2) linear feet of re-pointed mortar joint in area as directed by Owner’s Representative Subject to acceptance by DAS, mock-up may be retained as part of finish work. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up. Pre-installation Meetings: prior to commencing work meet with Owner’s Representative to discuss procedures, including estimated linear foot allowance of re-pointing for each building. Notify Owner’s Representative at least three (3) days in advance of the time of the meeting.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packaging and Shipping: Deliver materials in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and type of material. Acceptance at Site: Verify that product delivered matches product applied to the approved mock-up. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Store materials in a dry location, indoors or covered with a tarp or other suitable protection.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Do not build or apply mortar products on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Take special care when constructing in extremely hot or cold weather. Comply with IMIAC standards.
Page 36 of 279
MAINTENANCE Extra Materials: Provide color mortar mix in each color as sufficient for an additional 50 linear feet of re- pointing for use by DAS in building maintenance and repair.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MASONRY UNITS Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) and Brick Units as per manufacturer’s standard products and dimensions.
MORTAR MIXES Manufacturers: SPEC MIX, Inc. (www.specmix.com) Mutual Materials (www.mutualmaterials.com) Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
Mortar mixes shall be: Material: Pre- blended factory mix of Portland cement and hydrated lime, masonry cement or mortar cement, sand aggregate and color pigments. Mortar Type: Type N. Aggregate Type: Fine. Material Standard for Aggregate: Comply with ASTM C144. Material Standard for Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150. Material Standard for Hydrated Lime: Comply with ASTM C207. Material Standard for Masonry Cement: Comply with ASTM C91. Material Standard for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C270. Material Standard for Masonry Grout: Comply with ASTM C476. Material Standard for Pigments: Comply with ASTM C979. Material Standard for Blended Hydraulic Cements: Comply with ASTM C595. Material Standard for Mortar Cement: Comply with ASTM C1329. Mortar Color: Custom as required to match existing for each building and variation within building.
Page 37 of 279
EXISTING PRODUCTS Proportions, aggregate type, texture and color of repointing mortars shall match properties of existing original mortars in adjacent wall areas as closely as possible. PART 3 EXECUTION MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS Comply with the instructions and recommendations of mortar manufacturer.
EXAMINATION Site Verification of Conditions: Verify site conditions are acceptable for use of mortar mixes. Do not proceed with use of mortar mixes until unacceptable conditions are corrected. After thorough cleaning of masonry walls with pressurized water examine joints and estimate percentage of mortar joints requiring repointing. Both during cleaning and routing of old mortar joints, carefully examine veneer panels (i.e.: Marble) for signs of failure of clips, angles, etc. which attach panels to building structure. Notify Owner’s Representative at least three (3) days in advance of the time of the meeting.
RE-POINTING Do not begin work until meeting with Owner’s Representative to discuss observed conditions, including estimated liner foot allowance of mortar joints to be re-pointed. Old mortar should be cut out, by means of a toothing chisel or a special pointer's grinder, to a uniform depth of 3/4 in., or until sound mortar is reached. Care shall be taken not to damage the stone or brick edges. All dust and debris must be removed from the joint by brushing, blowing with air or rinsing with water. Weep tubes: Where mortar removal includes areas with existing weep tubes, take care to preserve existing tubes in undamaged, unblocked condition. Where existing tubes are blocked, carefully remove obstructing material using thin metallic probe. Replace all damaged tubes with new tubes of similar size and material. Insure proper drainage function is restored. Re-pointing mortar should be pre-hydrated to reduce excessive shrinkage. The proper pre-hydration process is as follows: All dry ingredients should be thoroughly mixed. Only enough clean, potable water should be added to the dry mix to produce a damp, workable consistency that will retain its shape when formed into a ball. The mortar should stand in this dampened condition for 1 to 1 1/2 hr. Observe mixing times of 4 - 5 minutes, consistent from batch to batch. A. Maintain a uniform water/cement ratio. B. Do not re-temper colored mortars. Discard mortar 2.5 hours after initial mixing.
Page 38 of 279
C. Rinse out mixer or mixing vessel following each batch of mortar. D. The joints to be tuck-pointed should be dampened. To ensure a good bond the brickwork must absorb all surface water. E. Water should be added to the pre-hydrated mortar to bring it to a workable consistency, drier than conventional mortar. F. The mortar should be packed tightly into the joints in thin layers (1/4 in. [6 mm] maximum). Each layer should become "thumbprint hard" before applying the next layer. G. The joints should be tooled to match the original profile after the last layer of mortar is "thumbprint" hard. Keep tooling time consistent. Do not strike joint too early or too late in order to maintain color consistency. H. Cure mortar a minimum of 28 days.
CLEANING Cleaning Method: Clean mortar only with potable water or dry brush. Clean masonry with the least aggressive cleaning solution and technique possible. Comply with cleaning procedure and recommendations of the manufacturers of both the cleaning solution and the unit masonry. Utilize the same cleaning procedure on the sample panel at selection and during construction.
PROTECTION Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.
END OF SECTION 04901 BRICK AND STONE MASONRY & REPOINTING OF MORTAR
Page 39 of 279
SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Structural steel Architecturally exposed structural steel Grouting Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 1 Section “Quality Requirements: for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications: for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural- steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. Division 9 Paint Sections and Division 9 Section “High-Performance Coatings: for surface preparation and priming requirements.
DEFINITIONS Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” That support design loads. Elements of steel plate shear walls as identified on structural drawings. Heavy Sections: ASTM A 6, Group 3 shapes with flanges thicker than 1 ½ inches, and Groups 4 and 5 shapes; plates exceeding 2 inches in thickness, including base plates and plates in welded built-up members. Seismic Critical Welds: Complete penetration welds in beam-to-column connections, including flange, web, flange reinforcement, stiffener plate, and double plate welds. Complete penetration welds of column splices and of columns-to-base plates. Other welds indicated as “Seismic Critical” on the drawings.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
37
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. Structural steel shop drawings shall contain sufficient detail and information to allow complete fabrication and erection of the structure without reference to the Contract drawings either on the fabrication shop floor or at the project site. The steel detailer shall generate all shop drawing fabrication and installation details from the structural and architectural drawings and Specifications. The use of reproductions or photocopies of the Contract drawings shall not be permitted. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Include embedment drawings. Indicate welds by standard current AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Indicate type, size and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high strength bolted connections. Shop drawings re-submittals shall clearly identify all revision to previous submittals. Heavy ink, clouded outlines (revision clouds) shall be drawn around revised area of individual sheets. Engineer/Architect will not review information outside of revision clouds on re-submitted drawings. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance: Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and owners and other information specified. Welding Certificates: Current Certified Welding Certificates are required for shop fabricators; Current Certified Welding Certificates are required for welder performing any field alterations i.e. steel welding performed outside of the primary shop fabrication facility. Structural steel erection plan detailing sequence and methods of erection The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive engineering analysis, signed and sealed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Oregon, verifying that the structure erected over occupied space will comply with the current edition of the Uniform Building Code during all phases of construction. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying the following products comply with requirements: Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. Bolts, nuts and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. Direct—tension indicators. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. Shear stud connectors. Shop primers. Non-shrink grout. Certified Manufacturer’s Test Reports All Steel Receiving Seismic Critical Welds: Tensile tests and chemical analysis including all trace elements.
38
Heavy Sections Receiving Seismic Critical Welds: Charpy V-notch as specified in Part 2 of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the work. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated as AISC-Certified Plant as follows: Category: Category (Previous Cat. 1) conventional steel structures. Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC’s Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1, P2 or P3 or SSPC-QP 3, “Standard Procedures for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators.”
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from inclement weather site erosion and deterioration. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. Store welding electrodes as specified by AWS.
COORDINATION Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions, for installation.
EXEMPTION TO AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
39
Add the following paragraph to Section 1.8.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges: “The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for site safety. The Fabricator and Erector shall review the Contract Documents and if the structure, as shown on those documents, is in conflict with the requirements of any safety regulations, the Fabricator shall notify the Structural Engineer of Record prior to commencing shop drawing production. If the Fabricator and/or Erector fail to notify the Structural Engineer of Record prior to commencing ship drawing production. If the Fabricator and/or Erector fail to notify the Structural Engineer of Record, as stated above, they shall become responsible for all costs for correcting such conflicts with the requirements of any and all safety regulations”. Revise first sentence of Section 1.8/2 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges as follows: “The Structural Engineer of Record shall be responsible for the adequacy of the structural design of the structure in the completed project”. Add the following paragraph to Sections 7.5.1 and Section 7.5.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges: “The Owner’s Designated Representative for Construction shall prepare the Embedment Drawing. The Embedment Drawing shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer of Record for information only. The Structural Engineer of Record shall not be responsible for the review and approval of the Embedment Drawing”. Add the following paragraph to Section 7.10.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges: “The Erector shall have the sole responsibility for determining the means and methods used to properly and adequately brace the framing during erection”. Revise the second paragraph of Section 7.10.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges as follows: “The Erector need not consider loads during erection that result from the performance of work by, or the acts of, others, except as specifically identified by the Owner’s Designated Representatives for Design and Construction, nor those that are unpredictable, such as loads due to hurricane, tornado, explosion or collision. The Erector shall determine, furnish and install temporary supports to resist earthquake leads specified by the 2003 International Building Code for New Buildings”. Revise Section 7.14 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges as follows: “The correction of minor misfits by moderate amounts of reaming or grinding and the drawing of elements into line with drift pins, shall be considered to be normal erection operations. Errors that cannot be corrected using the foregoing means, or that require welding, cutting, or changes in member or Connection configuration, shall be promptly reported to the Owner’s Designated Representatives for Design and Construction and the Fabricator by the Erector, to enable the responsible entity to either correct the error or approve the most efficient and economical method of correction to be used by others”. Particular note shall be paid to the commentary for this Section of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, which reads as follows: 40
As used in this Section, the term “moderate” refers to the amount of reaming, grinding, welding or cutting that must be done on the project as a whole, not the amount that is required at an individual location. It is not intended to address limitations on the amount of material that is removed by reaming at an individual bolt hole, for example, which is limited by the bolt-hole size and tolerance requirements in the AISC and RSSC Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: Refer to the General Structural Notes. W and WT Shapes: ASTM A 991 Heavy sections shall be supplied with Charpy V-Notch testing in accordance with ASTM A 6, Supplementary Requirement S5. The impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 20 foot-pounds absorbed energy at +70 degrees F and shall be con ducted in accordance with the following exceptions: The center longitudinal axis of the specimens shall be located as near as practical to midway between the inner flange surface and the center of the flange thickness at the intersection with the web mid-thickness. Tests shall be conducted by the producer on material selected from a location representing the top of each ingot or part of an ingot used to produce the product represented by these tests. For steel produced by the continuous casting process, samples may be taken at random. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 572, Grade 50. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572, Grade 50. Cold Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grace B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. Welding electrodes shall have a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi using AWS A5 classification test. Welding filler metals, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall meet the requirements for H16 (16 mL diffusible hydrogen per 100 grams deposited weld metal) as tested using the mercury or gas chromatograph method as specified in AWS A4.3, “Standard Methods for Determination of Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding.” The manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance shall be considered adequate proof that the supplied electrodes meet this requirement, and no additional testing of filler metal samples or of production welds is required. All low hydrogen electrodes shall be stored, handled, protected from atmospheric exposure and re-dried, if required, per AWS D1.1, 5.3. FCAW electrodes shall be received in moisture-resistant packages that are undamaged. They shall be protected against contamination and injury during shipment and storage. Electrode packages shall remain effectively sealed against moisture until the electrode is required for use. When removed from the protective packaging and installed on machines, care shall be taken to protect the electrodes and coatings, if present, from deterioration or damage. Modification or lubrication of an electrode after manufacture 41
for any reason is not permitted, except drying shall be permitted when recommended by the manufacturer. For welded joints defined as seismic critical, welding filler metals shall provide the following minimum mechanical property requirements in the designated testing, as described below: Charpy V-Notch (CVN) Toughness 20 ft.-lbs. at 0 degrees F using AWS A5 classification test methods. CVN Toughness 40 ft.-lbs. at 70 degrees F using Specification Section 05120, Section 1.5K. Yield Strength: 58 ksi minimum using the AWS A5 classification test. Elongation: 22 percent using the AWS A5 classification test.
BOLTS, CONNCECTORS, AND ANCHORS High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A-325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A- 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. Finish Plain. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible-washer type. Finish: Plain High Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 Type I, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension- control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 compressible washer type, plain. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F1852, Type 1, heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. Finish Plain. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type cold-finished carbon steel; AWS DS1.1, Type B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554 Grade 55, wieldable straight (unless noted otherwise on the Contract drawings). Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain. Threaded Rods: A 572, Grade 50 or ASTM A 36, as indicated on Contract drawings. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plan.
PRIMER Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I or II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil and alkyd. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type I or II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. 42
Primer SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer. Primer: Fabricator’s standard lead-and chromate-free, non-asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MP#18, MP #19, or SSPC-Paint 20, ASTM A 780.
FABRICATION Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” with exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. Camber structural steel members where indicated. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until steel has been erected. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL DAS will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. Additional Testing, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.” Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspections, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency’s option: Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
43
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify elevations of concrete-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedment’s, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION Provide temporary shores, guys, braces and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges: with exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section. Base Plates: Clean concrete-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates. Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims or setting nuts as required. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
44
Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. Splice members only where indicated. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes and plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. Do not use thermal cutting during erection without prior approval from Engineer. Reaming: Light drifting will be permitted to draw the parts together, but drifting to match unfair holes will not be permitted. Any enlargement of holes, necessary to make connections in the field shall be done by reaming with twist drills, care being taken not to weaken the adjoining metal. If, in the judgment of the Engineer/Architect, the extent of the reaming is such that holes cannot be properly filled or accurately adjusted after reaming, the faulty member shall be discarded and replaced with a new one, and all costs and expenses resulting there from shall be paid by the Contractor. Cutting and Fitting: No cutting of sections, either flanges, webs, stems or angles shall be done by the Contractor without the consent of the Engineer/Architect, unless this cutting is particularly specified or shown on the drawings. Tough-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Touch-up and Repair of Galvanizing: Immediately after erection, clean and repair any damaged galvanizing as outline in previous Section regarding galvanizing. Corrective Measures Any errors in locations or inaccuracies in the setting of anchor bolts, base plates, bearing plates or other items of attachment or support for steel work shall be reported to the Engineer/Architect, and shall be corrected in a manner subject to the approval of the Engineer/Architect. Any misfits due to errors in fabrication shall be reported immediately to the Engineer/Architect, along with proposed method of correction of same and Engineer/Architect approval obtained before proceeding with corrective measures. No members shall be cut or burned without specific approval in writing. Bolted or welded connections, joints, or fastenings, which are classified as defective in the opinion of the Engineer/Architect, shall be corrected by the Contractor in a manner subject to the Engineer/Architect’s approval. Fire retardant blankets shall be employed to completely contain arcs and spatter associated with welding during erection.
FIELD CONNECTIONS High-Strength Bolts: Field install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A-325 or A- 490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
45
Joint Type: As indicated on the Contract drawings. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. Comply with AISC’s “Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges” (With exceptions noted in Part 1 of this Specification Section) for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Remove backing bars of runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”: for mill material. Heavy Sections: Complete penetration groove weld in accordance with tension splice requirements of AISC Specification Section J1.5. The following additional requirements apply to seismic critical welds: Use electrodes specified for seismic critical welds. At beam flange to column welds, remove backing bars, back gouge, clean by grinding, and back weld with reinforcing fillet, unless drawings specifically indicate that backup bar may remain. Where backing bars remain, a 5/16-inch fillet weld shall be placed between the remaining fusible backing bar at the beam flange and the column. A reinforcing fillet shall not be placed between the backing bar and the underside of the beam flange. Cut-off runoff plates 1/18-inch from edges and grind smooth (not flush) All tack welds not incorporated into the final weld shall be removed. Provide Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs) for all WPSs. All WPSs for seismic critical welds must be qualified by testing including prequalified procedures in accordance with FEMA 353, Part 1, Appendix A. PQR shall include CVN testing as specified in Specification 05120, Part 1, “Submittals”. The use of copper backing bars are permitted in the WPS and welding under the following restrictions: The maximum root opening shall not exceed 7/16-inch. Root openings exceeding 7/16-inch shall use steel or ceramic backing bars. The WPS using copper backing bars shall be qualified by testing, per AWS D1.1, that they meet the following additional requirements: The weld metal of the root pass shall be analyzed for copper content. Copper shall not exceed 0.15 percent. The weld metal of the root shall be tested for Charpy V-notch toughness values per AWS D1.1, Annex 3, except the CVN specimen shall be taken a maximum of 1/16-inch from the bottom of the test plate. Weld metal shall meet or exceed 20 foot/pound at -20 degrees F. Tack welds incorporated into the final weld and weld repairs of seismic critical welds shall be of the same quality as the final welds, including preheat requirements. Filler metals shall be identical, unless qualified by testing and meeting the requirements of Specification 05120, Part 1, “Submittals” article. FCAW electrodes shall be protected from atmospheric exposure as follows:
46
Electrodes not consumed within 24 hours of accumulated exposure outside closed or heated storage shall not be used for seismic critical welds. Electrode spools shall be identified and monitored for total atmospheric exposure time. Electrodes that have been exposed for periods exceeding an accumulated 24 hours may be dried when manufacturer’s recommendations show that drying is effective at removing moisture and restoring electrodes to their designated diffusible hydrogen level. Dry as specified by the manufacturer. If the electrode or the electrode spool is damaged by baking, the electrode shall not be used. Each Welder working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark. Each Welder shall mark or stamp this identification symbol at each weldment completed and inspected by the Welder. Stamps, if used, shall be low-stress type. All welds shall be marked or stamped. Erection Connections, etc.: Place holes, plates, or other attachments required by the Erector so as not to interfere with or cause any other detrimental effect to structural members or their connections. Holes and attachments not shown on the structural drawings are not permitted within 1-foot of seismic critical welds or any portion of reduced beam sections.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: DAS will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports in accordance with “Testing and Inspection” Article. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. Bolted Connections: Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A-325 or A-490 Bolts”. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency’s option. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. In addition to visual inspection, field-welded shear connectors will be inspected and tested according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a continuous 360- degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS D1.1. 47
TESTING AND INSPECTION All structural steel work is subject to special inspection. DAS will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform inspections and tests, and to prepare test reports. Special Inspector: Testing Agency shall provide qualified “Special Inspector” who will perform the inspection services. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests, and state in each report whether test specimens comply with or deviate from requirements. Testing agency will notify the Owner’s Representative immediately of discrepancies in the work which are time-critical or affect the construction progress. Inspector will: Verify material identification. Verify bolt tightening. Inspect welding. Inspect welded headed studs. Shop Inspection: When approved by the Building Official, the Owner’s Representative, full-time special inspection in the fabrication shop by DAS’s Testing Agency may be waived, subject to the following: A. The Fabricator participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC- Certified Plant. B. All shop inspection is provided by the Contractor, per the requirements herein, and is documented. Reports and test results are to be available for the DAS’s inspector to review. C. A specific quality control plan for this project shall be developed and submitted to the Structural Engineer for approval prior to the prefabrication/pre-erection meeting. D. Periodic inspection by the Owner’s Inspection Agency is allowed by the Fabricator. E. Certified Plants: Continuous plant inspection is not required at plants producing prefabricated steel products which are certified by the Building Official. F. Contractor Responsibilities Related to Coordination of Shop and Field Inspections: G. Maintain complete records of all quality control and testing performed by the Contractor. H. Furnish all electrical power, turning or moving of members, hoisting, staging and other facilities required for inspections. I. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or erected so required inspections and testing can be accomplished. J. Correct deficiencies in, or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. K. Additional testing, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 48
L. Grant Inspectors full authority to inspect all material and work that fails to conform in every respect to these Specifications. M. When required by Engineer/Architect or DAS’s Independent Testing Agency or Contractor’s engaged inspection organization, make adequate platforms available to the inspector for the purpose of checking high-strength bolts and welds. Scaffolding shall be provided to ensure safe performance of this operation. Shop and Field Tests and Inspections: A. Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC’s “Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.” B. Direct tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2. C. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, welded connectors will be inspected and tested according to AWS D 1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency’s option, or as required by Contract Documents. D. Procedures: 1. Liquid Penetrant inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level “2-2T.” 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. E. Inspector shall: 1. Verify Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) sheet has been provided and has been reviewed with each welder performing the weld. Welds not executed in conformance with the WPSs are cause for rejection. 2. Verify fit-up meets tolerances of WPSs and mark joint prior to welding. 3. Verify welding consumables per WPSs. 4. Verify welding qualification and identifications. 5. Observe preheat and interpass temperatures, and weld pass sequence for conformance with WPSs. 6. Nondestructive test all complete penetration groove welds for conformance with weld quality and standard of acceptance per requirements for testing of welds subject to tensile stress by ultrasonic methods in AWS D1.1. Pass sound through entire weld volume from two crossing directions to the extent feasible. Nondestructive test all complete penetration groove welds of beam flanges to column flanges and column stiffeners and cap plates, and all complete penetration groove welds of column splices and columns to base plates for conformance with weld quality and standard of acceptance per requirements for testing of welds by magnetic particle testing in AWS D.1 in addition to ultrasonic testing methods. 7. All partial penetration, fillet, and other remaining welds shall be visually inspected. 8. Where ultrasonic testing is performed, the entire weld shall be tested.
49
9. Ultrasonically test base metal thicker than 1 ½ inches after welding is completed for discontinuities behind welds, in accordance with IBC Section 1703.3. 10. For seismic critical welds, inspect removal of backup bars and runoff plates, preparatory grinding, and execution of reinforcing fillet. 11. Test column webs for cracking using dye penetrant or magnetic particle test over 3-inch minimum zone above and below continuity (stiffener) plates after welding. All cracks shall be reported to the Engineer, repaired, and retested. No cracks will be permitted in the final construction. 12. When copper backing is utilized in a welded joint the inspector shall inspect the following: 13. The root opening tolerance of Section 2.5.C.10a. 14. The root pass shall be visually examined prior to placing the reinforcing fillet. 15. The copper backing bar shall be inspected after welding each joint for excessive melting. F. Welded Headed Studs: In addition to visual inspection, welded headed stud connectors will be inspected and tested according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a continuous 360-degree flash or many cases requiring welding repairs to any welded headed stud connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional welded headed stud connectors when weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS D1.1.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field connections, rust spots and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories and abutting structural steel. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 paint Section.
END OF SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
50
SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Shop fabricated miscellaneous steel items.
SUBMITTALS See Section 01300 – Administrative Requirement, for submittal procedures. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Welder’s Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS – STEEL Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. Plates: ASTM A 283 Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of Jurisdiction Having Authority.
FABRICATION Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
51
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
INSTALLATION Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
ERECTION TOLERANCE Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼ inch per story, non-cumulative. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: ¼ inch. Maximum Out-of-Position: ¼ inch. End of Section SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
52
SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Wall mounted interior & exterior handrails. Stair railings and guardrails, interior & exterior. Steel pipe handrails, balusters, pipe bollards and fittings.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Design, fabricate and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local building code requirements . Comply with applicable requirements of ADAAG accessibility.
PART 2 PRODUCTS RAILINGS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Design, fabricate and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable code. Design railing assembly, wall rails and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs. at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. Dimensions: See drawing for configurations and heights Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth. Mounting: Adjustable Brackets and flanges, with steel inserts for casting in concrete. Prepare backing plate for mounting in hollow wall construction.
53
Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing. Straight Splice Connectors: Steel concealed spigots. FABRICATION Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connections to building structure. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for deliver to site. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
METAL FINISHES Steel Preparation: SSPC-SP 6, commercial blast, apply primer within 30 minutes of preparation. Comply with AA DAF-45 for aluminum finishes required. High Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2604 multiple coat, thermally cured three-coat polymer system; color as scheduled. Steel Primer Coat: Zinc rich epoxy or urethane steel primer. Finish coat: Polyurethane or Fluropolymer, semi-gloss. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field applications.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
INSTALLATION Install in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with light joints. Anchor railings securely to structure. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible.
ERECTION TOLERANCES Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼ inch per floor level, non-cumulative.
54
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: ¼ inch. Maximum Out of Position: ¼ inch. END OF SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
55
SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Structural Metal Stud and Track. Metal Stud and Track Accessories.
RELATED SECTIONS Section 04813 - Masonry Veneer: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing. Section 05311 - Steel Floor Deck: Metal floor decking supported by wall stud metal framing. Section 05312 - Steel Roof Deck: Metal roof decking supported by wall stud metal framing. Section 06112 - Wood Framing and Sheathing. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Rough wood blocking. Section 07213 - Batt Insulation: Insulation within framing members. Section 07260 - Vapor Retarders. Section 07270 - Air Barriers. Section 09210 - Non-Structural Metal Framing. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board.
REFERENCES AISI S100-07- NASPEC (North American Specification) for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A 1003/A 1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. ASTM C 1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. Page 56
7 of 279
NAAMM ML/SFA 540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.
DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Design steel in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute Publication S100-07 "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members", except as otherwise shown or specified. Design loads: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: Exterior Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/240. Exterior Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/360. Exterior Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/600. Exterior Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/720. Exterior Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/900. Interior Load-Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/240. Interior Load-Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/360. Interior Load-Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/600. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of 67 degrees C (120 degrees F). Design framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances. Design exterior non-load-bearing curtain wall framing to accommodate lateral deflection without regard to contribution of sheathing materials. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with local code.
SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods. Shop Drawings:
Page 56
7 of 279
Showing plans, sections, elevations, layouts, profiles and product component locations, including anchorage, bracing, fasteners, accessories and finishes. Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, and accessories. Indicate method for securing studs and other components to tracks and for framing connections. Submit calculations for loadings and stresses under Professional Engineer's seal registered in the state of the project. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met: Product Data for Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2: For products being recycled, documentation of total weight of project waste diverted from landfill. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation including percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre consumer recycled content Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. Product Data for Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Submit data, including location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for main raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. Design structural elements under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and registered in the state of the project. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 of the Structural Welding Code. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedure.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Page 56
7 of 279
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with identification labels intact until ready for installation. Protect and store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather conditions. Products to be handled per AISI's "Code of Standard Practice".
SEQUENCING Ensure locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this Section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. Ensure that products of this Section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturer Used as the Basis for Design: MBA Metal Framing (www.mbastuds.com). Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. STRUCTURAL STUD AND TRACK General Requirements: Physical properties and load tables have been calculated in conformance with the 2007 NASPEC for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, unless noted otherwise. Load bearing (structural) cold-formed steel members shall be manufactured from structural quality steel having minimum yield strength of 33 ksi, having a minimum protective coating equal to G-60 galvanized finish, and conforming the following standards: ASTM A 653, ASTM A 875, ASTM C 955, or ASTM A 1003. All structural framing accessories shall be formed from steel having minimum yield strength of 33 ksi with minimum protective coating equal to G-60 galvanized finish Structural Studs: MBA Building Systems Structural Studs. Structural, cold-formed galvanized steel studs with punch outs for plumbing and wiring installations. Flange Width: 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) flange width. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inch (41 mm) flange width. Flange Width: 2 inch (51 mm) flange width. Flange Width: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) flange width. Page 56
7 of 279
Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250 depth. Web Depth: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) 350 depth. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. Web Depth: 4 inch (102 mm) 400 depth. Web Depth: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) 550 depth. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. Web Depth: 7-1/4 inch (184 mm) 725 depth. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. Web Depth: 10 inch (254 mm) 1000 depth. Web Depth: 12 inch (305 mm) 1200 depth. Web Depth: 14 inch (356 mm) 1400 depth. Web Depth: 16 inch (406 mm) 1600 depth. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1242 inch (3.15 mm) 118 Mils. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Structural Track: MBA Building Systems Structural Track. Structural, cold-formed galvanized steel track. Flange Length: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) 125. Flange Length: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) 150. Flange Length: 2 inch (51 mm) 200. Flange Length: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250. Flange Length: 3 inch ((76 mm) 200. Flange Length: As indicated on Drawings. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250 depth.
Page 56
7 of 279
Web Depth: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) 350 depth. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. Web Depth: 4 inch (102 mm) 400 depth. Web Depth: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) 550 depth. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. Web Depth: 7-1/4 inch ((184 mm) 725 depth. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. Web Depth: 10 inch (254 mm) 1000 depth. Web Depth: 12 inch (305 mm) 1200 depth. Web Depth; 14 inch (356 mm) 1400 depth. Web Depth: 16 inch (406 mm) 1400 depth. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1242 inch (3.15 mm) 118 Mils Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. ACCESSORIES Jamb Studs: MBA Building Systems Jamb Studs. Cold-formed galvanized steel studs with punch-out’s for plumbing and wiring installations. Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width 300. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width 350. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. 7. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 8. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. 9. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils.
Page 56
7 of 279
10. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils. 11. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. 12. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. 13. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Jamb and Header System: MBA Building Systems Jamb and Header System. Cold-formed galvanized steel studs with punch-out’s for plumbing and wiring installations. Jamb Section: Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width 300. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width 350. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 mils. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
Header Section: Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width 300. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width 350. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. Web Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.14 mm) 43 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.43 mm) 54 Mils.
Page 56
7 of 279
Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Clip: Flange Width: 3 inch (76 mm) flange width. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) flange width. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (0.68 mm) 68 Mils. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Slotted Deflection Track: MBA Metal Framing; cold-formed galvanized steel in conformance with AISI's Specification for Design of Cold-formed Steel Members. Designation and size as indicated on the drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.48 mm) 18 mils. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.80 mm) 30 mils. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 mils. Design Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) 43 mils Design Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) 54 mils Design Thickness: 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm) 68 mils. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250 depth. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) 362 depth. Web Depth: 6 inch (152 mm) 600 depth. Web Depth: 8 inch (203 mm) 800 depth. Standard leg 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) Standard Vertical Slot of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) throughout leg. Minimum yield strength for 16 gauge (1.37 mm) and heavier is 50 KSI and minimum yield strength on 18 gauge (1.09 mm) and lighter is 33 ksi.
Page 56
7 of 279
Furring Channel: MBA Building Systems Furring Channel for furring masonry walls and ceiling assemblies or in any other typical wall furring or cross-furring or framing application. Custom furring channel is available on request. Flange Width: 7/8 inch (22 mm) 87. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) 125. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. Member Depth: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) 125. Member Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. U-Channel: Size: 3/4 inches (19.1 mm). Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Size: 2 inches (51 mm). Size: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). Length: Manufacturer's standard length. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).
Z-Furring: MBA Building Systems Z-Furring to provide support for insulation while allowing for drywall attachment at masonry or concrete walls. Flange Depth: 1 inch (25 mm) 100. Flange Depth: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) 150. Flange Depth: 2 inch (51 mm) 200. Flange Depth: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) 250. Flange Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils.
Page 56
7 of 279
Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
Angle: MBA Building Systems Angle for use in a variety of applications. Leg Length: 7/8 inch (22 mm) by 1-3/8 inch (35 mm). Leg Length: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) by 1-1/2 inch (38 mm). Leg Length: 2 inch (51 mm) by 2 inch (51 mm). Leg Length: 3 inch (76 mm) by 3 inch (76 mm). Leg Length: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.44 mm) 54 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Flat Strapping: MBA Building Systems Flat strapping is used for lateral bracing, joist bridging and diagonal bracing to prevent racking. Strap Width: 1 inch (25 mm). Strap Width: 2 inch (51 mm). Strap Width: 3 inch (76 mm). Strap Width: 4 inch (102 mm). Strap Width: 5 inch (127 mm). Strap Width: 6 inch (152 mm). Strap Width: 7 inch (178 mm). Strap Width: 8 inch (203 mm). Strap Width: 9 inch (229 mm). Strap Width: 10 inch (254 mm). Strap Width: 11 inch (279 mm). Strap Width: 12 inch (305 mm). Strap Width: As indicated on Drawings. Design Thickness: 0.0188 inch (0.47 mm) 18 Mils.
Page 56
7 of 279
Design Thickness: 0.0283 inch (0.72 mm) 27 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 30 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch (0.88 mm) 33 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch (1.15 mm) 43 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.44 mm) 54 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1017 inch (2.58 mm) 97 Mils. Design Thickness: 0.1243 inch (3.16 mm) 118 Mils. Minimum Delivered Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. CRC Clip: MBA Building Systems CRC clips for use to secure cold rolled channel to individual framing members. Each clip is pre-punched ready for quick and easy installation. Leg Length: 1.5 inch (38 mm) by 3.25 (83 mm). Leg Length: 1.5 inch (38 mm) by 5.25 (133 mm). Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch (1.44 mm) 54 Mils. Web Stiffener: MBA Building Systems Web Stiffeners for use to improve the strength in joist and header applications. Web With: 4 inch (102 mm). Leg Length: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm). Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch (1.81 mm) 68 Mils.
MATERIALS Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M; unless indicated otherwise. Galvanized Coating: G60 coating weight minimum, complying with ASTM C 955.
FABRICATION General: Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting. Fabricate panels square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent racking or distortion. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened. Provide insulation as specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header members, which will not be accessible to the insulation Contractor.
Page 56
7 of 279
Axially Loaded Studs: Install studs to have full bearing against inside track web (1/8 inches (3.2 mm) maximum gap) prior to stud and track attachment. Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding. Welding: Welding is permitted on 18 gauge or heavier material only. Specify welding configuration and size on the Structural Calculation submittal. Qualify welding operators in accordance with Section 6.0 of AWS D.1.3. Touch up all welds with zinc-rich paint in compliance with ASTM A 780
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Before beginning installation, verify that substrate conditions previously installed under other Sections are acceptable for installation of metal framing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Verify bearing elevations supporting members are correct before framing materials are installed. Select fasteners of adequate type, number, and quality to perform intended functions. Verify rough-in utilities and chases are in correct locations and do not interfere with framing placement. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. PREPARATION Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. INSTALLATION General Erection Requirements: Install cold-formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 1007. Weld in compliance with AWS D.1.3. Install in compliance with applicable Sections of the AISI's Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions. Wall Systems: Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with the Drawings and the approved shop drawings. Handle and lift prefabricated panels in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any member.
Page 56
7 of 279
Anchor runner track securely to the supporting structure. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been achieved. Provide a sill sealer or gasket barrier between all concrete and steel connections. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or butt- weld or splice them together. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks except when vertical movement is specified. Frame wall openings to include headers and supporting studs as shown in the Drawings. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames, window frames, and other similar openings. Install jack studs or cripples below window sills, above window and door heads, at freestanding stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, securely attached to supporting members. Attach wall stud bridging in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on Drawings as "shear walls" for frame stability and lateral load resistance. Where indicated in the Drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using a vertical slide clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Install extended leg ceiling runners. Coordinate placement of insulation in stud spaces after stud frame erection.
ERECTION TOLERANCES Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspection: Cooperate with DAS inspection agency for periodic special inspections required by local code authorities. DAS will hire and pay inspection agency.
Page 56
7 of 279
Submit schedule showing when the following activities will be performed and resubmit schedule when timing changes. Notify inspection agency not less than 3 days before the start of any of the following activities. Inspections are required during welding operations, screw attachment, bolting, anchoring and other fastening of components within the force resisting structural system, including struts, braces, and hold- downs. PROTECTION Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
Page 56
7 of 279
SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Finish carpentry items. Wood casings and moldings. Closet shelving and rod. Furnishing panel and lumber for matching Casework.
PART 2 PRODUCTS LUMBER MATERIALS Hardwood Lumber: select white birch or poplar species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent, with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
SHEET MATERIALS Hardwood Plywood: HPVA-HP-1 Grade A, Type match lumber; Veneer core, type of glue recommended for application; same as lumber face species, same as lumber cut. Medium Density Fiberboard – MDF: Sierra Pine, Medex, Moisture resistant, no added formaldehyde. Hardboard: AHA A135-4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 – Tempered, ¼ inch thick, smooth one side (S1S). FABRICATION When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
SHOP FINISHING Sand work smooth and set exposed mails and screws. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. On items to receive transparent finished, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
Page 56
7 of 279
Field Finish/Shop Finish optional: Transparent finish over dark stain, specified in Section 09900, match Architect’s sample. Finish Work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1500, System TR-6 (Transparent). Back Prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION Protect Work from moisture damage.
EXAMINATION Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
INSTALLATION Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 56
7 of 279
SECTION 07141 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES Existing deck preparation. Reinforced waterproofing membrane. Insulating concrete paver assembly. Related Sections Include the following: Division 2 Section “Demolition”. Division 7 Section “SBS Modified Bituminous Roofing”. Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”.
PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water and complies with physical requirements in CAN/CGSB-37.50. “Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing.” Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. FMG Listing: Provide “Accepted” FMG ballasted roof system assembly in accordance with FM Data Sheet 1-29. Provide ballast securement system in accordance with the requirements for strapping and securing for Exposure C, building height of under 50-feet, and 120 MPH wind speed (System 1). Wind Zone 3: For velocity pressures on entire roof assembly (including roof deck) of 160 lbf/sq. perimeter uplift force, 160 lbf/sq ft. corner uplift force, and 104 lbf/sq ft. outward force on edges. UL Listing: Provide roofing system and components that have been tested for application and slopes indicated, and are listed by UL for Class A external fire exposure. Provide roof system materials bearing UL Classification marking on packaging, containers, rolls, etc., indicating that materials have been produced under UL’s Classification and follow-up service.
ABBREVIATIONS ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute. ASTM ASTM International (formerly American Society for Testing and Materials). FMG Factory Mutual Global. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association. UL Underwriters Laboratories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed to install waterproofing manufacturer’s products; and who is eligible to receive waterproofing warranty specified. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, sheet flashings, protection course, through one source from a single manufacturer. Mockups: Apply waterproofing to 100 SF of deck and wall conditions to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatments, thickness, texture and execution quality. Install pavers and paver supports to demonstrate aesthetic affects and quality of materials and execution. If Owner’s Representative determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing and reinstall pavers until mockups are approved. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.” Review requirements for waterproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashing, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture and directions to storing and mixing with other components. Store materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Remove and replace materials that con not be applied within their stated shelf life. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperature recommend by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below 0 degree F.
Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: American Hydrotech, Incorporated; Monolithic Membrane 6125. American Permaquik Incorporated; Permaquick 6100. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div; CCW-500. Tremco; Tremproof 150. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
MEMBRANE Single-component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt with the following properties measured per applicable test methods in CAN/CGSB-37.50: Flash Point: Not less than 260 degree C or not less than 25 degrees C above manufacturer’s maximum recommended application temperature. Cone Penetration: 110 maximum at 25 degree C and 200 maximum at 50 degree C. Flow: 3mm maximum at 60 degree C. Toughness: Not less than 5.5 J Ratio of Toughness to Peak Load: Not less than 0.040. Adhesion Rating: Pass Water-Vapor Permeance: 1.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m. Water Absorption: 0.35-g maximum gain, or 0.16-g maximum mass loss. Pinholding: None. Low-Temperature Flexibility: No cracking. Crack Bridging Capability: No cracking, splitting, or loss of adhesion. Heat Stability: Comply with requirements for penetration, flow, low-temperature flexibility and viscosity when heated for five hours at manufacturer’s recommended application temperature. Viscosity Test 2 to 15 seconds.
INSULATION Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578; of type, density and compressive strength indicated below; fabricated with rabbeted edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels. Type VII, 2.2-lb/cu. Ft. minimum density and 60-psi minimum compressive strength. Overall thickness of insulation assembly: 2 inches. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Dow Chemical Company.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Verify concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method, according to ASTM D 4263. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions, Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. All concrete surfaces must be dry, smooth, free of depressions, voids, protrusions, clean and free of unapproved curling compounds, form release agents and other surface contaminants. All concrete surfaces shall be No 2 finish or better in accordance with ICRI standards. Remove all existing roofing materials and other contaminants that may affect adhesion of new waterproofing membrane. Use grinders or other mechanical means to remove all materials not allowed to remain on the surface of existing concrete. Surfaces to receive new waterproofing materials must be clean and smooth concrete, free of all freeing debris. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, re-circulating blast cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface fee of laitance, glaze, and efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners or form- release agents. Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. Remove fins, ridges and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets and other voids.
JOINTS, CRACK, AND TERMINATIONS Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joint and cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to CAN/CGSB-37.51, “Application of Rubberized Asphalt, Hot- Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing,” and waterproofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate in a layer of hot.
END OF SECTION SECTION 07141 HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07142 COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLDES Waterproofing membrane, sheet flashing and accessories, including: Geomembrane protection course. Drainage panels. Substrate preparation.
RELATED SECTIONS Soil and rock anchors, lagging. Sub drainage: Foundation drainage piping, filter fabric, and drainage fill. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete placement, curing, and finishing. Shotcrete. Precast Structural Concrete: Precast concrete members and placement. Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies. Wood Decking: Plywood decks. Joint Protection.
REFERENCES ASTM C 836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course; 2000. ASTM C 898 - Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with Separate Wearing Course; 2001. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers--Tension; 1998a (Reapproved 2002). ASTM D 543 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics; 2000. ASTM D 1434 - Standard Test Method for Determining Gas Permeability Characteristics of Plastic Film and Sheeting; 1982 (Reapproved 1998).
ASTM D 1621 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam); 1981 (Reapproved 1990). ASTM D 1709 - Standard Specification for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method; 2001. ASTM D 1777 - Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials; 1996 (Reapproved 2002). ASTM D 1790 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastic Sheeting by Impact; 2002. ASTM D 3786 - Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics--Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method; 1987. ASTM D 4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 1983 (Reapproved 1999). ASTM D 4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2002/ ASTM D 4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a. ASTM D 4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 1991 (Reapproved 1996). ASTM D 4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 1991 (Reapproved 1996). ASTM D 4716 - Test Method for Determining the (In-plane) Flow Rate per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head; 2001. ASTM D 4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 1999a. ASTM D 4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembrane, and Related Products; 2000. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000. ASTM E 97 - Standard Method of Test for Directional Reflectance Factor, 45-Deg 0-Deg, of Opaque Specimens by Broad-Band Filter Reflectometry; 1982 (Reapproved 1987); Withdrawn 1991. ASTM E 154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 1999. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 1996 (Reapproved 2002). ASTM G 23 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of waterproofing specified submit manufacturer's printed technical data, tested physical and performance properties, instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrates, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings: Drawings prepared specifically for this Project, showing locations and extent of waterproofing, details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashing, penetrations, and termination conditions.
Samples: Submit two samples of each of the following: Waterproof membrane material. Geomembrane material. Drainage panel. Joint reinforcing strip. Installer Certification: Certificate signed by manufacturer certifying installer qualifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing and approved by waterproofing manufacturer for the installation of the specified waterproofing system. Mock-Up: Apply waterproofing system to 100 square feet (9.3 sq m) of surface to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, and standard of workmanship. Notify Owner’s Representative one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will be prepared. If Owner’s Representative determines mock-up does not meet requirements, reapply waterproofing until mock-up is approved. Retain and maintain approved mock-up during construction in undisturbed condition as standard for judging completed waterproofing. Undamaged mock-up may become part of the completed Work. Pre-installation Meeting: Hold a pre-installation meeting prior to application of waterproofing system to ensure proper substrate and installation conditions; require attendance of Contractor and applicator; invite Owner’s Representative and special inspector, if any.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to site labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. Store materials as required by waterproofing manufacturer in clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Protect adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to other finish surfaces. Perform Work only when existing and forecast weather conditions are within manufacturer's recommendations for material and application method used; minimum ambient temperature is 45 degrees F (7 degrees C).
WARRANTY General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive DAS of other rights DAS may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Provide written warranty signed by waterproofing manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight within the specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 3 years after date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Basis of Design: Epro Waterproofing Systems (www.eproserv.com). Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. Single Source: Obtain all waterproofing materials and system components from a single manufacturer.
WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS General: Provide waterproofing systems that prevent the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and that comply with specified physical requirements as demonstrated by testing performed by independent testing agency on manufacturer's current waterproofing formulations and system design; use materials specified below.
Blindside/Lagging Walls First Course: Lagging walls, lagging timbers and soldier beams Second Course: Polyethylene drainage panel applied directly to lagging surface. Third Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Fourth Course: Shotcrete, as specified in applicable section.
Blindside/Shotcrete and Soil Nails First Course: Shotcrete, with weep holes extending into drainage panel; as specified in Section 03 37 13. Second Course: Polyethylene drainage panel applied directly to Shotcrete surface. Third Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm).
Fourth Course: Shotcrete, as specified in applicable section. Blindside/Soil Nails and Earth First Course: Polyethylene drainage panel applied directly to soil surface. Second Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80-mils (2mm) minimal thickness average when dry, minimum 60-mils (1.5mm). Third Course: Shotcrete, as specified in applicable section. Blindside/Sheet Piling First Course: Sheet Piling. Second Course: Polyethylene drainage panel applied directly to Sheet Piling surface. Third Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80-mils (2mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60-mils (1.5mm). Fourth Course: Shotcrete, as specified in
Underground Structures, Including Tunnels Top/Outside Waterproofing (See Slab on Grade Section) First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Second Course: Polyethylene geomembrane, 10 mils (0.25 mm) thickness. Third Course: Polyethylene drainage panel.
Foundation Walls not More Than 12 Feet (3660 mm) Below Grade First Course: Standard duty fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, spray-applied, or roller- applied high performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing; 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Second Course: Polyethylene drainage panel.
Foundation Walls First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Second Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, minimum 8 mils (0.20 mm) thickness. Third Course for Vertical Structures 30 Feet (9150 mm) High or Less: Polyethylene drainage panel. Third Course for Vertical Structures over 30 Feet (9150 mm) High: Standard duty polypropylene drainage panel.
Foundation Walls First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm).
Second Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, minimum 10 mils (0.25 mm) thickness. Third Course: Rigid insulation, as specified in Section 07 22 18. Fourth Course for Vertical Structures 30 Feet (9150 mm) High or Less: Polyethylene drainage panel. Fourth Course for Vertical Structures over 30 Feet (9150 mm) High: Standard duty polypropylene drainage panel.
Planters - Concrete and Concrete Masonry First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Second Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, minimum 10 mils (0.25 mm) thickness. First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Second Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, minimum 10 mills (0.25 mm) thickness. Second Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, minimum 15 mils (0.38 mm) thickness. Third Course: Polyethylene drainage panel. Third Course: Sand/gravel drainage course, with sub drainage piping; see Section 33 46 00. Third Course: Polyethylene drainage panel covered with sand/gravel drainage course, with sub drainage piping; see Section 33 46 00. Finish Course: Planting soil, as specified elsewhere.
Slab-On-Grade, Waterproofing Under Slab Sub base: Sand over rough grade; as specified in Section ______. First Course: Reinforcing/Barrier sheet, fabric side down. Second Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm); reinforce junctions with vertical walls with polyester fabric. Third Course: Reinforcing/Barrier sheet, fabric side up. Finish Course: Concrete Slab as indicated in Drawing.
Slab-On-Grade, Methane Barrier/Waterproofing Under Slab Sub base: Sand over rough grade; as specified in Section 31 23 00. First Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, 10 mils (0.25 mm) thickness. Second Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm); reinforce junctions with vertical walls with polyester fabric.
Third Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, 10 mils (0.25 mm) thickness.
Slab-On-Grade, Mud Slab Construction First Course on Top of Mud Slab: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 120 mils (3 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 100 mils (2.5 mm) with polyester fabric embedded between 60-mil (1.5 mm) coats. Second Course: Reinforcing/Barrier sheet, fabric side up, or other protection as approved by waterproofing manufacturer. Finish Course: Concrete slab as indicated on Drawings.
Concrete Plaza Decks - For Pervious Paving First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 120 mils (3 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 100 mils (2.5 mm) with polyester fabric embedded between 60-mil (1.5 mm) coats. Second Course: Polyethylene geomembrane, minimum 15 mils (0.38 mm) thickness. Third Course: Polyethylene drainage panel. Third Course: Polypropylene drainage panel. Finish Course: Paving as specified elsewhere.
Concrete Decks - For Bonded Finish First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Second Course: Reinforcing/barrier sheet, fabric side up, or 30 pound roofing cap sheet. Finish Course: As specified elsewhere.
Concrete Decks – For Unbonded Finish First Course: High performance fluid-applied membrane waterproofing, 80 mils (2 mm) nominal thickness average when dry, minimum 60 mils (1.5 mm). Second Course: Polyethylene Geomembrane, minimum 15 mils (0.38 mm) thickness. Finish Course: As specified elsewhere.
WATERPROOFING MATERIALS High Performance Fluid-Applied Membrane Waterproofing Epro ECOLINE; single course, high build, cold-applied, waterborne polymer modified asphalt emulsion; capable of spray, roller, and brush application at ambient temperatures; non-toxic and odorless; with the following properties when cured:
Spray-Applied: ECOLINE-S. Roller/Brush-Applied: ECOLINE-R. Applied Dry Thickness: 80 mils (2 mm), nominal, 60 mils (1.5 mm) minimum, unless specified otherwise. Tensile Strength: 32 psi (220 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. Elongation - Spray-Applied: 4,140 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. Elongation - Roller/Brush-Applied: 3,860 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. Resistance to Decay - Spray-Applied: 4 percent permanent loss, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, section 13. Resistance to Decay - Roller/Brush-Applied: 9 percent permanent loss, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, section 13. Resistance to Aging: No effect when tested in accordance with ASTM G 23 for 2000 hrs. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.026 grains/sq ft/hr (0.018 g/h sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.21 perms (12 ng/(Pa s sq m)), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance: 26 psi (179 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 751. Methane Transmission Rate: 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1434. Adhesion - Spray-Applied: Minimum 11 lbf/inch (1.9 kN/m) to peel from concrete and masonry, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 836, C 794 method. Adhesion - Roller/Brush-Applied: Minimum 7 lbf/inch (1.2 kN/m) to peel from concrete and masonry, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 836, C 794 method. Hardness: 80 to 85, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 836. Crack Bridging: No cracking when tested in accordance with ASTM C 836. Low Temperature Flexibility: Flexible down to 13 degrees F (minus 10 degrees C), at least, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 836. Sulfuric and Hydrochloric Acid Resistance: No effect with a 10 percent solution, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 543.
Standard Duty Fluid-Applied Waterproofing Membrane Epro ECOBASE; single course, high build, cold-applied, waterborne polymer modified asphalt emulsion; capable of spray, roller, and brush application at ambient temperatures; non-toxic and odorless; with the following properties when cured: Applied Dry Thickness: 80 mils (2 mm), nominal, 60 mils (1.5 mm) minimum, unless specified otherwise.
Tensile Strength: 19 psi (131 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. Elongation: 5,380 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412. Water Vapor Permeance: .17 perms, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance: 19 psi (131 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 751. Adhesion: Minimum 11 lbf/inch (1.9 kN/m) to peel from concrete and masonry, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 836. Shrinkage: 0.02 percent, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 836. Low Temperature Flexibility: No cracking when tested at minus 13 degrees F (minus 10 degrees C) in accordance with ASTM C 836. Sulfuric and Hydrochloric Acid Resistance: No effect with a 10 percent solution, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 543. Polyethylene Geomembrane: Epro ECOSHIELD-E; cross-linked polyolefin. 8 mil (0.2 mm) Thickness: Puncture Resistance: 876 grams, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1709. Tensile Strength: 24.59 lb/in (4.3 kN/m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154 in the machine direction. Tear Resistance: 3.48 lbf ,minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.00711 grains/sq ft/hr. (0.005 g/h sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.0143 perms (0.8 ng/(Pa s sq m)), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 10 mil (0.25 mm) Thickness: Puncture Resistance: 1593 grams, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1709. Tensile Strength: 34.6 lb/in (6.1 kN/m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154 in the machine direction. Tear Resistance: 5.98 lb (26.6 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.00621 grains/ft/hr. (0.004 g/h sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.0133 perms (0.76 ng/(Pa s sq m)), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 15 mil (0.38 mm) Thickness: Puncture Resistance: 1898 grams, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1709. Tensile Strength: 39.7 lb/in (6.9 kN/m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154 in the machine direction. Tear Resistance: 9.74 lbf (43.3 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533.
Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.00585 grains/ft/hr. (0.004 g/h sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.0123 perms (0.71 ng/(Pa s sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Low Temperature Impact Resistance: Resistant to impact down to minus 157 degrees F (minus 105 degrees C), at least, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1790. Chemical and Environmental Resistance: Excellent, Ref: Koemer, Robert, 1994 "Designing with Geosynthetics." 3rdedition, General chemical resistance guidelines Methane Gas Transmission: 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1434 modified.
Reinforcing/Barrier Sheet Polypropylene/polyethylene geomembrane, ECOSHIELD P or PP; 4 mil (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene laminated with 4 oz. per sq yd. (0.13 kg/sq m) polypropylene non-woven fabric; providing good adhesion for grouts, mortars, and adhesives. Breaking Load: 127 lbf (533 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632 (Grab tensile) Elongation: 50 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. Bursting Strength: 240 psi (1.65 Mpa), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3786. Puncture Resistance: 70 lbf (311 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4833. Ultraviolet Resistance: 70 percent strength retained, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4355 after 150 hours exposure. Light Reflectance: 88 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 97. [ASTM E 97 no longer in print.] Methane Gas Transmission: 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1434 modified. Polyethylene Drainage Panel: ECODRAIN-E, 3 dimensional molded high density polyethylene composite drainage panel; non-biodegradable; with permeable geo-textile heat bonded to drainage core. Vertical In-Plane Water Flow Rate: 5.1 gpm/ft. width (1 L/s/m width), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4716. Core: Compressive Strength: 5,200 psf (249 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. Thickness: 0.31 inch (7.9 mm), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1777. Fabric: Polypropylene. Perpendicular Water Flow Rate: 55 gpm/sq ft. (37 L/h/sq m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Permittivity: 0.7/second, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Apparent Opening Size: 70 sieve size, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. Elongation: 60 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632.
Bursting Strength: 140 psi (0.96 Mpa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3786. Breaking Load: 130 lbf (578 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632 (Grab tensile). Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (178 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4833. Tear Resistance: 60 lbf (267 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533 (trapezoidal tear).
Standard Duty Polypropylene Drainage Panel ECODRAIN-S-6000; 3 dimensional molded polypropylene composite sheet panel; non-biodegradable; with permeable geo-textile heat bonded to drainage core. Horizontal In-Plane Water Flow Rate: 3.2 gpm/ft width (0.66 L/s/m width), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4716. Vertical In-Plane Water Flow Rate: 18 gpm/ft width (3.7 L/s/m width), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4716. Core: Compressive Strength: 17,000 psf (813 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. Thickness: 0.40 inch (10.2 mm), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1777. Fabric: Woven polypropylene. Perpendicular Water Flow Rate: 110 gpm/sq ft (74 L/h/sq m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Permittivity: 1.6/second, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Apparent Opening Size: 80 sieve size, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. Elongation: 50 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. Bursting Strength: 315 psi (2171 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3786. Tensile Strength: 110 lbf (489 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632 (Grab tensile). Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf (400 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4833. Tear Resistance: 65 lbf (289 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533 (trapezoidal tear).
High Performance Polypropylene Drainage Panel ECODRAIN-S-9000; 3 dimensional molded polypropylene composite sheet panel; non-biodegradable; with permeable geo-textile heat bonded to drainage core.
Horizontal In-Plane Water Flow Rate: 3.8 gpm/ft width (0.79 L/s/m width), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4716. Vertical In-Plane Water Flow Rate: 21 gpm/ft width (4.35 L/s/m width), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4716.
Core: Compressive Strength: 18,000 psf (861 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. Thickness: 0.40 inch (10.2 mm), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1777. Fabric: Woven polypropylene Water Flow Rate: 100 gpm/sq ft (68 L/h/sq m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Permittivity: 1.36/second, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Apparent Opening Size: 40 sieve size, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. Elongation: 24 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. Bursting Strength: 480 psi (3309 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3786. Tensile Strength: 365 lbf (1623 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632 (Grab tensile). Puncture Resistance: 105 lbf (467 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4833. Tear Resistance: 115 lbf (511 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533 (trapezoidal tear). Drainage Strip: 3 dimensional molded polystyrene core; non-biodegradable; wrapped with permeable geotextile. In-Plane Flow Rate: 21 gpm/ft width (4.35 L/s/m width), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4716 at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and 10 psi (69 kPa) loading. Unobstructed Inflow Area: 85 percent. Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm). Compressive Strength: 6,000 to 9,000 psf (287 to 431 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. Shear Strength: 6,000 to 9,500 psf (287 to 455 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. Fungus Resistance: No growth, when tested in accordance with ASTM G 21, both core and fabric. Fabric: Woven polypropylene, 4 oz/sq yd (0.13 kg/sq m). Perpendicular Water Flow Rate: 170 gpm/sq ft (116 L/h/sq m), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Permeability: .20 cm/sec, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. Apparent Opening Size: 80 sieve size, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. Elongation: 50 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. Bursting Strength: 240 psi (1654 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. Tensile Strength: 115 lbf (511 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632 (Grab tensile). Puncture Resistance: 70 lbf (311 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4833. Tear Resistance: 50 lbf (222 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533 (trapezoidal tear).
Ultraviolet Resistance: 85 percent retained strength, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4355. Sheet Flashing: 60 mil (1.5 mm) thick reinforced modified asphalt sheet with double-sided adhesive. Joint Reinforcing Strips: Manufacturer's recommended polypropylene and polyester fabric. Joint Detailing Mastic: ECOLINE-T, high viscosity polymer modified water based asphalt. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or over spray affecting other construction. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with joint detailing mastic, hydraulic cement, or rapid-set grout. Prepare and treat vertical and horizontal 90 degree terminations, edge terminations, penetrations through waterproofing material, expansion joints, cracks, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's recommendations. At each area to be treated, apply two coats of joint detailing mastic; embed joint reinforcing strip in first coat and apply second coat entirely covering the embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring complete saturation. 90 Degree Terminations, Vertical and Horizontal: 6 inches (150 mm) on each side. Penetrations, Drains, Sleeves: 6 inches (150 mm) radius around penetration and 3 inches (75 mm) onto penetrating object. Joints and Cracks: 6 inches (150 mm) wide on each side of joint/crack. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks in accordance with ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces. Joints and Cracks Greater Than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) In Width: Prior to applying joint detailing mastic, rout out joint/crack, install backer-rod and sealant to bring flush to surface. Secure and protect plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing through waterproof membrane prior to membrane application.
When it is not possible to install waterproofing before placement of reinforcing steel, exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by General Contractor prior to membrane application.
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION Mix and apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not start waterproofing installation until manufacturer's technical representative is present. Apply waterproofing to surfaces according to manufacturer's recommendations and details and as indicated in Contract Documents. Apply waterproofing by spray, unless otherwise indicated, achieving a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases. If clearance from surfaces is less than 24 inches (610 mm), making spray application difficult, roller application is acceptable. Spray Application: Apply one spray coat to achieve full specified thickness Roller Application: Apply minimum of two coats to achieve full specified thickness. Install geomembrane courses over nominally cured fluid-applied membrane no later than recommended by manufacturer and before starting subsequent construction operations. Overlap geomembrane course seams and treat overlap as recommended by manufacturer and secure with specified tape; attach geomembrane to sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer. Drainage Panels: Place and secure panels to substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives and adhesive strips (sheet flashing that does not penetrate waterproofing) as recommended by manufacturer. Overlap edges of dimpled core and ends of geo-textile to maintain continuity. Protect installed panels during subsequent construction. Install drainage strip at foot of each wall, on top of footing, extending to sub drainage system or to daylight at lower grade elevation. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Verify thickness of membrane using a lightly oiled, needle nose depth gauge, taking four (4) readings over a one square inch area in every 100 square feet (25 mm square area in every meter square area). Record the minimum reading. Mark test areas for repair if minimum reading is below minimum specified thickness. Patch deficient test areas with additional waterproofing to achieve specified minimum dry thickness, extending minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) beyond the test perimeter. CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07142 COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07210 THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction and new skylights. B. Acoustic Board Batt Insulation C. Black Faced Semi rigid Insulation
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a. B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014. E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012. F. NAIMA - Recommendations for Installation in Residential and Other Light-Frame Construction - Fiber Glass Building Insulation; North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; 1999.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Glass MINERAL Wool: Interchangeable with fiber glass, but replacing the term with the intent to disassociate and differentiate Glass Mineral Wool from the potential health and safety of special purpose or reinforcement products that do not meet the bio soluble criteria of insulation made from glass.
1.04 LEED REQUIREMENTS A. If the owner (DAS) has requires that the project will achieve LEED certification these will be per the Requirements Outlined in Section 01 81 13.17 - Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED v4 ID+C.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. B. Samples: Submit two samples of insulation items 12 by 12 inches square illustrating material of each type specified. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Submit all required LEED documentation per the submittal requirements outlined in Section 01 81 13.17 - Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED v4 ID+C.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
2.01 APPLICATIONS A. INSULATION A: Insulation around new skylight at roof: Extruded polystyrene board.
B. INSULATION F: Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. C. INSULATION G: Insulation behind linear wood walls: Black faced semi rigid Batt Insulation.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. INSULATION A: Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type X; Extruded Polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type XII, 15 psi (104 kPa), minimum. 2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Thickness: Match existing assembly. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Type and Water Absorption: Type XII, 0.3 percent by volume, maximum, by total immersion.
2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. General Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blankets insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. B. INSULATION F: Glass Mineral Wool Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 4. Facing: Un-faced. 5. Manufacturers: a. Knauf Insulation; www.knaufinsulation.com b. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. c. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. d. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com . e. Or equal.
2.04 BLACK FACED SEMIRIGID BATT INSULATION
A. INSULATION G: Black-faced glass mineral wool blanket. B. Use 1 inch thick blankets. C. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Duct Liner; www.knaufinsulation.com 2. Certainteed; Certapro Acoustic Blanket; www.certainteed.com 3. Johns Manville; Linacoustic; www.jm.com. 4. Or approved equal.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Flashing Tape: Special polyolefin film with high performance adhesive. 1. Application: Interior window and door sill flashing tape. 2. Width: Are required for application. 3. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F to 212 degrees F 4. Manufacturers: B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. 1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and containing no Urea Formaldehyde. Oregon Department of Administrative Services Oregon State Library TI
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER LOW SLOPE ROOF DECK A. Board Installation over Roof Deck, General: 1. See applicable roofing specification section for specific board installation requirements. 2. Fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing in same day.
3.03 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. C. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation . 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION 07210 THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. Roofing System Design: Provide a roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE7. Corner Uplift Pressure: 195 lbf/SF. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 135 lbf/SF. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 90 lbf/SF. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG’s “Approval Guide” for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.
SUBMITTALS Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing systems. Maintenance Data: For roofing systems to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer’s product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer’s warranty. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing and FMG approval for roofing system identical to that used for this Project. Fire Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer’s written instruction and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. Special warranty includes substrate (lightweight insulating concrete), roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, fasteners and other components of roofing system. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Special Installer’s Warranty: Submit roofing Installer’s warranty, signed by installer covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS INSULATION ASSEMBLY MATERIALS General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer’s standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: Verify roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. Verify wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. Verify surface plane flatness and overall installation of lightweight insulating concrete assemblies comply with manufacturer’s requirements, and are properly cured. Verify fastener pull-out testing has been performed and accepted. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSULATION ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Provide treated wood stops as recommended by the manufacturer of the roofing materials. Notify Owner’s Representative when installation is complete, prior to covering with overlay board, for a review of fasteners patterns. ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA’s “Quality Control Guideline for Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing.” GRANULE SURFACED ROOD SYSTEM INSTALLATION Base Ply Sheet Installation All layers of roofing shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases, or fish mouths and shall be laid at right angles to the slope of the deck. Install one layer of base-ply sheet according to roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions starting at low point of roofing system. Sheets shall be laid into a uniform layer of adhesive, with adhesive applied using a mechanical spreader as approved by the manufacturer for uniform adhesive application. Sheet shall be laid directly behind the adhesive applicator. Align base-ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of base-ply sheets uniformly to ensure required number of base-ply sheets covers substrate at any point. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend base-ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. Sheets shall be fully bonded to the substrate and each other and shall have a minimum of 3-inch side laps and 6-inch end laps. Sufficient pressure shall be exerted across the sheet during application, using an aluminum rake, rubber squeegee, or broom, to ensure prevention of air pockets.
FLASHING AND STRIPING INSTALLATION Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this Section
SUMMARY This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: Formed wall flashing and trim. Formed equipment support flashing. Counter flashings and other roof-related flashings for new roof system. Insulated paver wind securement systems.
RELATED SECTIONS Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry” for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. Division 7 Section “modified bituminous membrane roofing” or installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. Division 7 Section “Hot Fluid Applied Waterproofing”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300 stainless steel. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, and hex washer head. Blind Fasteners: High strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION GENERAL General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and butyl sealant. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than ¾ inch for wood screws. Galvanized or Pre-painted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. Copper: Use copper, hardware bronze, or stainless-steel fasteners. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Fire stopping systems including the following: Fire resistive joint fire containment. Fire containment for single membrane penetrations. Penetrations through fire-rated vertical and horizontal assemblies. Firestop sealants. Firestop pillows. Firestop composite sheets. Firestop tapes. Firestop wrap strips. Firestop putty Firestop mortar. Firestop sprays. Through penetration fire stopping.
RELATED SECTIONS Joint Protection. Plaster and Gypsum Board. Plumbing Fixtures. Decentralized HVAC Equipment. Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack.
REFERENCES American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI/UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. ANSI/UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ANSI/UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. ANSI/UL 1709 - Rapid Rise Fire Tests of Protection Materials for Structural Steel. ANSI/UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. ASTM E 1399 - Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems. ASTM E 1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems. ASTM E 1529 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Effects of Large Hydrocarbon Pool Fires on Structural Members and Assemblies. ASTM E 1725 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Fire-Resistive Barrier Systems for Electrical System Components. ASTM E 2307 - Fire Tests of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate Scale, Multi-Story Test Apparatus. FM Global (FM) - FM4991 - Standard for Approval of Firestop Contractors. International Code Congress (ICC): International Building Code (IBC). International Residential Code (IRC). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Building Materials Directory; Through-Penetration Firestops Systems (XHEZ), Joint Systems (XHBN), Firestop Devices (XHJI), Forming Materials (XHKU), Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV), and Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW).
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide systems that are listed by at least one the following: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), in "Fire Resistance Directory". Intertek Testing Service (Formerly known as Omega Point Laboratories), in "Directory of Listed Products." Any other qualified independent testing and inspection agency that conducts periodic follow-up inspections and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide firestop products that are flexible enough to allow for pipe vibration in a through penetration application. Provide firestop sealants and sprays for construction joint applications that are flexible enough to satisfy the movement criteria per the test standards ASTM E 1399, ASTM E 1966 or ANSI/UL 2079.
Provide products that meet the intent of the L rating classification for the movement of smoke per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations and ANSI/UL 2079 for construction joints. Provide products identical to those tested and listed for classification by UL, Intertek or any other qualified independent testing agency. Provide products that bear classification marking of qualified independent testing agency. Where firestop systems not listed by any listing agency are required due to Project conditions, submit a substitution proposal with evidence specified. Use only products specifically listed for use in listed systems. Provide products that are compatible with each other, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping, under the conditions represented by this Project, based on testing and field performance demonstrated by manufacturer. Firestopping materials must meet and be acceptable for use by all building codes and NFPA codes cited in this Section.
SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Shop Drawings: For each firestopping system, provide the following: Listing agency's detailed Drawing showing opening, penetrating item(s), and firestopping materials, identified with listing agency's name and number or designation and fire rating achieved. For proposed systems that do not conform strictly to the listing, submit listing agency's Drawing marked to show modifications and approved by firestop system manufacturer. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of conformance signed by firestop system manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with requirements. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product data sheets on each material to be used in firestop systems. Information on manufacturer's product data sheet should include: Product characteristics including compliance with appropriate ASTM/UL/ANSI test standards. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation Instruction: Furnish manufacturer's installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE General: All through-penetration firestop systems shall be installed with approved methods using materials that have been tested and classified to an approved assembly. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this Section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty five (25) years’ experience. Installer Qualifications: Firm must be qualified by having experience, staff, and be properly trained to install the specified products, and meets the following criteria:
Contractor is acceptable to manufacturer. Contractor is acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. Contractor has completed the manufacturer's certified product installation training. Contractor must provide a list of completed projects as evidence of experience; include project name and address, owner's name and address, and Architect's name and phone number. Certificate: Contractor should provide certificate of qualification. Codes: Where manufacturer's application procedures are in conflict with those of the code authority having jurisdiction, the more strict guidelines will prevail. Pre-installation Meetings: Meetings to agree on firestop requirements, conditions, manufacturer's instructions.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver and store products until ready for installation in manufacturer's original unopened packaging, legibly marked with manufacturer's name and product identification, date of manufacture, lot number, and shelf life, listing agency's classification marking, curing time, and mixing instructions if applicable. Store and handle in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, and other causes; follow manufacturer's instructions. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordinate construction and cutting of openings so that each particular firestop system may be installed in accordance with its listing, including sizing, sleeves, and penetrating items. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install firestopping under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. Provide ventilation as required by firestopping manufacturer, including mechanical ventilation if required.
WARRANTY At Project closeout, provide to Owners Representative an executed copy of the manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Basis of Design: 3M Fire Protection Product (www.3m.com/firestop). Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. Single Source: To maintain control and integrity of the firestop applications a single manufacturer should be used. Specific UL or approved listing agencies systems applicable to each type of firestop condition should be supplied by one manufacturer.
SCOPE/APPLICATION Provide installed firestop protects that limit the spread of fire, heat, smoke, and gasses through otherwise unprotected openings in rated assemblies, including walls, partitions, floors, roof/ceilings, and similar locations, restoring the integrity of the fire rated construction to its original fire rating. Provide firestop systems listed for the specific combination of fire rated construction, type of penetrating item, annular space requirements, and fire rating, and the following criteria: F-Rating: Equal to or greater than the fire-resistance rating of the assembly in which the firestopping will be installed. T-Rating: In habitable areas where penetrating items are exposed to potential contact with materials on fire side(s) of rated assembly, T-rating must equal its F-rating. L-Rating: L-rating of 1 cfm per linear foot (5.5 cu m/h/m) maximum at ambient temperatures. Wall Penetrations: Systems must be symmetrical, with the same rating from both sides of the wall. Testing: Determine ratings in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479. Provide firestopping systems listed for construction gaps per the specific combination of fire-rated construction type, configuration, gap dimensions, and fire rating, and the following criteria: Fire resistance rating must be equal to or greater than that of the assembly in which it is to be installed. Movement capability must be appropriate to the potential movement of the gap, demonstrated by testing in accordance with ASTM E 1399 for minimum of 500 cycles at 10 cycles per minute. L-Rating: L-rating of 1 cfm per linear foot (5.5 cu m/h/m) maximum. Determine ratings in accordance with UL 2079.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 3M Fire Barrier Cast-in-Place Devices Firestopping device for use prior to a concrete pour. Adjustable height with pull tabs, straight edge design for close placement to walls and adjacent devices. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Ultra RC Pack One piece metal collar assembly encasing intumescent material for firestopping of pipes and cables through rated walls and floors. Fire Resistance: For use in 1 or 2 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Ultra Plastic Pipe Device Intumescent device for firestopping of plastic pipe and cables through rated walls and floors. Configuration: One-piece metal collar, with locking latch and bendable tabs to secure; equipped also for conventional anchoring. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems. Specify either FS 195+ Wrap Strip or 3M Interam Ultra GS Wrap Strip when specifying this product. See "Q" or "R" below. 3M Fire Barrier RC-1 Restricting Collar: For firestopping of plastic pipes from 4 inches (102 mm) to 10 inches (254mm) in diameter. Material: 28 gauge steel. Size: 25 foot (7.6 m) roll.
3M Fire Barrier CP25WB+ Sealant Intumescent water-based latex caulk. No-sag, fast drying, paintable, red in color. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier IC 15WB+ Sealant Intumescent latex based sealant. No-sag, fast drying, paintable. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M FireDam 150+ Acrylic Latex Sealant Single part, water based, acrylic latex sealant. No-sag, low-shrinkage, low VOC. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Watertight Silicone 3000 WT Sealant Water-tight intumescent silicone sealant for filling voids in concrete gypsum, metal, plastic, wood and insulation. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier 1000 NS Silicone Sealant Non-slump firestopping sealant for floor and wall openings.
Hardness (ASTM C 661): 1000 NS: 20 - 25. Service Temperature (ASTM C 1299): -60 - 300 degrees F (-51 - 149 degrees C). Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier 1003 SL Silicone Sealant Self-leveling firestopping sealant for floor openings. Hardness (ASTM C 661): 1003 SL: 10 - 15. Service Temperature (ASTM C 1299): -60 - 300 degrees F (-51 - 149 degrees C). Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+ One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent firestop. Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non- toxic synthetic formula. Type: Stick or Pad Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV Foam Two-part, liquid-silicone elastomer, foams in place when mixed. For use sealing large or complex openings such as cable bundles, cable trays and conduit banks. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Mortar For sealing openings in concrete and masonry walls and floors. Self-Leveling, non-sag, low VOC. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Self-Locking Pillow Self-contained, intumescent firestop pillow with interlocking strips. Meets fire rating without the use of wire mesh. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Pillow Self-contained, intumescent firestop product. Meets fire rating without the use of wire mesh. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier CS-195+ Composite Sheet Organic/inorganic intumescent elastomeric sheet, bonded on one side to a layer of 28 gauge galvanized steel. Other side reinforced with steel-wire mesh and covered with aluminum foil. Re-enterable. Thickness: Nominal 0.3 inch (7.6 mm). Thermal Expansion: 8 - 10 times original size. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 93.6 psi (645 kPa)/489 percent. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.
3M Interam Ultra GS Wrap Strip Graphite based, flexible, largely inorganic, intumescent mat. For use firestopping around non-metallic piping. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier FS-195+ Wrap/Strip One-part, organic/inorganic intumescent strip with foil on one side. May be cut to fit irregular shapes. Length: 24 inch (610 mm). Width: 1 or 2 inches. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier Pass-through Devices One-Piece device for firestopping of cable penetrations through rated walls and floors. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M FireDam 150+ Acrylic Latex Sealant Single part, water based, acrylic latex sealant. Endothermic, no-sag, low-shrinkage, low VOC. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier 2000 NS Silicone Sealant Non-slump sealant for wall joints. Service Flexibility: Accommodate vibration from normal building movement. Pipe Size Capability: Maximum pipe size of 24 inches (610 mm). Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 31 percent of original joint width. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.
3M Fire Barrier 2000+ Silicone Sealant Elastomeric, firestopping sealant. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 15 percent of original joint width. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.
3M FireDam Spray 200 Water based, spray applied firestopping for use at head-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-floor and perimeter joints. Paintable, low VOC. Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 25 percent of joint width. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire rated systems.
FIRESTOPPING FOR SINGLE MEMBRANE PENETRATIONS 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+ One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent firestop. Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non- toxic synthetic formula. Type: Pad. Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire rated systems.
3M Endothermic Mat E-5A-4 Endothermic heat absorbing mat. Type: Mat. Fire Resistance: For use in 1 or 2 hour fire rated systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Conduct tests according to manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt and other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of firestopping. Verify items penetrating fire rated assemblies are securely attached, including sleeves, supports, hangers, and clips. Verify openings and adjacent areas are not obstructed by construction that would interfere with installation of firestopping, including ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction. Verify environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestopping.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Install masking and temporary coverings as required to prevent contamination or defacement of adjacent surfaces due to firestopping installation.
INSTALLATION Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation instructions and procedures. Install so that openings are completely filled and material is securely adhered. Where firestopping surface will be exposed to view, finish to a smooth, uniform surface flush with adjacent surfaces. After installation is complete, remove combustible forming materials and accessories that are not part of the listed system. Repair or replace defective installations to comply with requirements. At each through penetration, attach identification labels on both sides in location where label will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Clean firestop materials off surfaces adjacent to openings as Work progresses, using methods and cleaning materials approved in writing by firestop system manufacturer and which will not damage the surfaces being cleaned. Notify Authority Having Jurisdiction when firestopping installation is ready for inspection; obtain advance approval of anticipated inspection dates and phasing, if any, required to allow subsequent construction to proceed. Do not cover firestopping with other construction until approval of authority having jurisdiction has been received.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL DAS will engage an independent testing agency to inspect installed firestopping and to prepare reports indicating whether the installed Work complies with the Contract Documents. Notify testing agency at least 7 days prior to date when firestopping installation will be ready for inspection; obtain advance approval of general schedule and phasing, if any, required to allow subsequent construction to proceed.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove left over material and debris from Work area. Use necessary means to protect film before, during, and after installation.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. Install identification Labels for Through Penetration and Construction Joint Systems: Pressure sensitive self-adhesive vinyl labels, preprinted with the following information: The words "WARNING - THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM - DO NOT DISTURB. NOTIFY BUILDING MANAGEMENT OF ANY DAMAGE." Listing agency's system number or designation. System manufacturer's name, address, and phone number. Installer's name, address, and phone number. General Contractor's name, address, and phone number (if applicable).
END OF SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING
`SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Polyurethane construction sealant. Clear sealant. Polyurethane adhesive sealant.
RELATED SECTIONS Cast-in-Place Concrete. Faced Architectural Precast Concrete. Stone Assemblies. Metal Wall Panels. Plastic Siding. Entrances and Storefronts. Fiberglass Windows. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
REFERENCES ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM C 661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. ASTM E 162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. ASTM E 662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). International Maritime Organization (IMO/MED).
SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Division 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: Preparation instructions and recommendations.
STORAGE AND HANDLING Installation methods including joint design, surface preparation, and application methods. Submit manufacturer's test reports indicating test results of adhesion and/or compatibility testing of samples of substrates which either come in contact with or are in close proximity to sealants. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
MOCK UP Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. Prepare mock-ups for sealants and for each type of surface using same materials, tools, equipment, and procedures intended for actual surface preparation and application under actual use and environmental conditions. Verify adhesion of sealants and compatibility of materials in contact with or in close proximity to sealants. Perform manufacturer's required adhesion-to-substrate pretest. Test for sealant and surface staining or discoloration. Obtain Owner’s Representative's approval of mock-ups. Retain mock-ups to establish intended standards by which sealants will be judged.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying: Product name. Manufacturer. Sealant color. Sealant batch or lot number.
Sealant use-before date. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Store materials in a clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store sealants within temperature range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. Do not use materials after manufacturer's use-before date.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. Do not apply sealants to surfaces that are wet, damp, or contain frost. Do not apply sealants when air or surface temperature is below 35 degrees F (4 degrees C). Use caution when applying sealants when air or surface temperature above 120 degrees F (49 degrees C).
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURER 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
CONSTRUCTION SEALANT Construction sealants shall be formulated one component, moisture cure exhibiting high tensile strength, permanently elastic, low modulus and a paintable surface after cure. Heat Resistance: Long term exposure to temperatures greater than 194 degrees F (90 degrees C) will decrease tensile strength over time. Do not use in applications where the temperatures will continuously exceed 194 degrees F (90 degrees C).
3M Polyurethane Construction Sealant 525. Properties: Tack-Free Time at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 90 - 150 minutes. Rate of Cure at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 1/8 inch (3 mm) per 24 hour. Shore A Hardness (ASTM C 661): 25. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 400 psi (2.6 MPa).
Elongation at Break (ASTM D 412): Greater than 600 percent. 100 percent Modulus (ASTM D 412): 44 psi (0.3 MPa). Service Temperature: -22 degrees F - 176 degrees F (-30 degrees C - 80 degrees C). Specific Gravity: 1.17. Consistency: Medium paste. VOC Content: 35.1 g/L. Compliance: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35. Use T, NT, G, A, M. NSF R2 Coating for Use on Structural Surfaces (White and Gray only). Color: As indicated on Drawings.
3M Polyurethane Sealant Properties: Tack-Free Time at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 60 - 90 minutes. Rate of Cure at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 1/8 inch (3 mm) per 24 hour. Shore A Hardness (ASTM C 661): 40. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 300 psi (2.1 MPa). Elongation at Break (ASTM D 412): Greater than 600 percent. 100 percent Modulus (ASTM D 412): 58 psi (0.4 MPa). Service Temperature: -40 degrees F - 194 degrees F (-40 degrees C - 90 degrees C). Specific Gravity: 1.17. Consistency: Medium paste. VOC Content: 53.7 g/L. Compliance: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Federal Railroad Administration: Surface Flame Spread ASTM E 162, Smoke Generation ASTM E 662. Bombardier: SP800-C. Toxic Gas Production. IMO/MED: International Maritime Organization. Color: As indicated on Drawings. CLEAR SEALANT 3M Crystal Clear Sealant 230 Description: Single component thermoplastic elastomer.
Tack-Free Time at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: Less than 20 minutes. Skin Time at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 3 minutes. Shore A Hardness (ASTM C 661): 25-35. Elongation at Break (ASTM D 412): 500 percent. Service Temperature: -35 degree F - 350 degrees F (-37 degrees C - 177 degrees C). Specific Gravity: 0.93. Consistency: Medium paste. VOC Content: 158 g/L.
ADHESIVE SEALANT Construction sealants shall be formulated one component, moisture cure exhibiting fast curing, high tensile strength, permanently elastic, high modulus and a paintable surface after cure. Heat Resistance: Long term exposure to temperatures greater than 194 degrees F (90 degrees C) will decrease tensile strength over time. Do not use in applications where the temperatures will continuously exceed 194 degrees F (90 degrees C).
ADHESIVE SEALANT 3M Polyurethane Adhesive Sealant Fast Cure 550. Properties: Tack-Free Time at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 50 - 90 minutes. Rate of Cure at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 3/16 inch (4 mm) per 24 hour. Shore A Hardness (ASTM C 661): 45. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 450 psi (3.1 MPa). Elongation at Break (ASTM D 412): Greater than 600 percent. 100 percent Modulus (ASTM D 412): 87 psi (0.6 MPa). Service Temperature: -40 degrees F - 194 degrees F (-40 degrees C - 90 degrees C). Specific Gravity: 1.17. Consistency: Medium paste. VOC Content: 29.0 g/L. Compliance: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. NSF R2 Coating for Use on Structural Surfaces (White and Gray only). IMO/MED: International Maritime Organization. Color: As indicated on Drawings.
ADHESIVE SEALANT 3M Polyurethane Adhesive Sealant 551 Properties: Tack-Free Time at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 2 - 3 hours. Rate of Cure at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 3/16 inch (4 mm) per 24 hour. Shore A Hardness (ASTM C 661): 45. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 450 psi (3.1 MPa). Elongation at Break (ASTM D 412): Greater than 600 percent. 100 percent Modulus (ASTM D 412): 87 psi (0.6 MPa). Service Temperature: -40 degrees F - 194 degrees F (-40 degrees C - 90 degrees C). Specific Gravity: 1.17. Consistency: Medium paste. VOC Content: 36.5 g/L. Color: As indicated on Drawings.
ADHESIVE SEALANT 3M Polyurethane Adhesive Sealant 560 Properties: Tack-Free Time at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 50 - 60 minutes. Rate of Cure at 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 3/16 inch (4 mm) per 24 hour. Shore A Hardness (ASTM C 661): 55. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 580 psi (4 MPa). Elongation at Break (ASTM D 412): Greater than 300 percent. 100 percent Modulus (ASTM D 412): 145 psi (1.0 MPa). Service Temperature: -40 degrees F - 194 degrees F (-40 degrees C - 90 degrees C). Specific Gravity: 1.17. Consistency: Medium paste. VOC Content: 56.0 g/L. Compliance: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Federal Railroad Administration: Surface Flame Spread ASTM E 162, Smoke Generation ASTM E 662.
Bombardier: SP800-C. Toxic Gas Production. Color: As indicated on Drawings.
ADHESIVE SEALANT 3M 755 Hybrid Sealant Tack-Free Time 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: 40 - 70 minutes. Rate of Cure 73 degrees F and 50 percent Relative Humidity: Greater than 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) per 24 hours. Shore A Hardness (ASTM C 661): Greater than 45. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): 225 psi (1.6 MPa). Elongation at Break (ASTM D 412): Greater than 120 percent. 100% Modulus (ASTM D 412): 375 psi (greater than 2.7 MPa) Service Temperature: 40 degrees F - 190 degrees F (-40 degrees C - 90 degrees C). Specific Gravity: 1.58. Consistency: Medium paste. VOC Content: 41 g/L.
3M 4000UV Sealant. Base: Polyether. Density in lbs/Gallon: Approximately 11.7. Color: White. Consistency: Medium Paste. Service Temperature: 40 degrees F - 190 degrees F (-40 degrees C - 90 degrees C). Sag: Less than 3/8 inch Boeing Flow. Shore A Hardness: 38-39. 180 degree Peel Strength: One inch (2.54 cm) wide specimen on canvas. Tested at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C), 50 percent relative humidity. Overlap Shear Strength: One inch (2.54 cm) overlap specimens (0.093 inch thickness). Tested at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C), 50 percent relative humidity.
PRIMERS Fritted Glass Primer 3M P590. Color: Black. Viscosity: 12-15 sec (DIN cup).
Solids (percentage): 28.5. VOC g/L: 687. Active Ingredient: NCO/MEK.
Plastic Primer 3M P591. Color: Black. Viscosity: 12-15 sec (Ford Cup). Solids (percentage): 36.5. VOC g/L: 613. Active Ingredient: NCO/MEK.
Metal Primer 3M P592 Color: Clear. Viscosity: Extremely low. Solids (percentage): 1.5. VOC g/L: 790. Active Ingredient: Silane/Ethanol.
Teak and Glass Primer 3M P595. Color: Black. Viscosity: 50 mPa*s. Solids (percentage): 29.5. VOC g/L: 793. Active Ingredient: NCO/MEK.
CLEANER 3M C596 Color: Clear. Viscosity: Extremely low. Solids (percentage): 3.
VOC g/L: 798. Active Ingredient: Silane/Ethanol.
ACCESSORIES 3M Bond breaker Tape. 3M Masking Tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Surfaces to be sealed or bonded shall be clean and dry. Surfaces shall be free from grease, mold release, oil, water/condensation, and other contaminants that may affect the adhesion of the sealant. Abrade with 180 to 220 grit abrasive followed by a solvent wipe to improve the bond strength where adhesion testing indicates need. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure joint thickness is as indicated on Drawings. Clean surfaces within 1 to 2 hours before applying sealants.
INSTALLATION Application Temperature: 40 degrees F to 95 degrees F (5 degrees C to 35 degrees C). Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with uniform appearance and in proper relation with adjacent materials. Pre-testing for adhesion is required to determine if a primer is needed. Do not apply polyurethane sealants and adhesive sealants on frozen nor wet surfaces. Do not apply over silicone nor in the presence of curing silicone nor hybrid products. Avoid contact with alcohol and solvents during curing. Sealant can be tooled immediately after applying to give desired appearance.
CLEANING Remove excess sealants from glass, metal, and plastic surfaces while still uncured. Remove excess sealants from porous surfaces after initial cure or set-up.
PROTECTION Protect sealants in joints from damage until fully cured. Protect installed products until completion of Project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS
SECTION 08109 DOORS, FRAMES, DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY It is the responsibility of the Owner’s Representative, Contractor, Subcontractors, Hardware Consultant, Security Consultant, and Supplier to specify, furnish and install hardware that is coordinated, functional, ADA-compliant, and complies fully with DAS Construction Standards. These standards are intended as a guideline for quality and operation and are not to be construed as a complete list of all material and/or requirements. It is the specific responsibility of the Architect, Hardware Consultant (HC), and Supplier to specify and furnish complete hardware for all opening that is functional, meets the owners intended use, and in full compliance with all State and Local Building Codes, Fire Codes, and ADA codes.
SECTION INCLUDES: Locks and Latches. Hinges. Flush Bolts. Closers. Stops. Kick Plates. Push/Pulls. Door operators. Lock cylinders. Weather stripping. Thresholds. Doors and Frames.
RELATED SECTIONS Steel Doors and Frames. Flush Wood Doors. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts. Door Hardware. Access Control System, Security Systems. Electrical: Power supply and additional accessories to electric hardware and security devices
PRODUCTS TO BE SUPPLIED BY A SINGLE VENDOR The following building materials must be provided by the same Vendor: Section Steel Doors and Frames. Section Flush Wood Doors. Section 8710- Door Hardware
RELATED DOCUMENTS Design and installation must be in full compliance with current National, State and Local Building Codes. Oregon Structural Specialty Code. Oregon Fire Code. Oregon Electrical Code. DAS Construction Standards that may impact this work product including: DAS Electrical Standards. Where conflicts arise between DAS Construction Standards, applicable codes, and other DAS preferences; the following hierarchy will be used to determine applicability: Adopted Codes and their referenced “standards”. DAS Construction Standards. Other DAS preferences. DAS may, at its discretion, instruct the Security Contractor or Hardware Consultant to prioritize other DAS preferences over these DAS Construction Standards to meet the requirements of a specific Project. DAS will provide this clarification in writing.
SUBMITTALS All design documents must be reviewed and approve by DAS in order to coordinate with existing systems and expectations.
PRODUCTS TO BE SUPPLIED BY Owner (DAS) AND INSTALLED BY Vendor. All newly installed doors with keyed locks shall have “construction” cores installed if the door requires locking or testing prior to turn over to the Owner. Construction cores to be supplied and installed by the General Contractor. Somewhere between Substantial Completion and the Certificate of Occupancy the Owner will turn over all “final” cores to the General NOTE: All knobs and lever lock sets shall have a standard “KIK” type lock cylinder. Additionally all crash bars, exit locks, exterior door locks, and mullions shall have LFIC “large format interchangeable core compatible for MEDECO LFIC cores” rim and or mortise cylinders to be installed. 1.3 PRODUCTS TO BE SUPPLIED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY VENDOR - (CONTINUED)
A. (continued) Contractor (or SCV if applicable) for installation. The door locks should be specified to accept a 6-pin Medeco keyway “KIK” cylinder or “LFIC” large format interchangeable core. Owner to work with prospective tenant to set up key system. Owner to work with Medeco vendor to provide keys, keying and cylinders (cores). All associated costs related to Medeco lock cylinders (cores), keys and keying of cylinders shall be funded by the project.
DEFINITIONS Should terms and definitions from this Section conflict with other terms and definitions from other DAS documents, the Security Contractor or Hardware Consultant should immediately seek written clarification of the meanings from the Owner’s Representative. This clarification request shall be in writing and the associated response shall be in writing by DAS.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Term Abbreviation Description
Access Control System ACS An electronic system where a valid credential, typically a proximity card, is presented to a reader thereby allowing the electric unlocking of a door.
American National ANSI As applies to this Security Standard, it means accepted Standards Institute cutouts and preparation of door frames and doors to allow the application of specific types of devices and locking hardware.
Architect/Engineer A/E A State of Oregon registered Architect or Engineer who has overall design responsibility for a contracted design project. The A/E may have sub-consultants such as electrical, mechanical and fire protection engineers. The Security Contractor may be contracted directly with the A/E.
Auto Operator AO Electrical or pneumatic door operator that operates a door automatically or with manual input. (Sometimes referred to as an “ADA operator” or “Handicap [sic] Operator.”)
Contractor -- Entity performing the Work; may be a General Contractor, Subcontractor, security contractor, security vendor, or hardware supplier.
Construction CSI The organization that determines the outline and general Specification Institute content of the Master Format specifications. More information may be obtained at http://www.csinet.org/s_csi/index.asp
Daisy -chain -- The wiring practice where like or related devices are wired on the same circuit in an "in/out" method maintaining circuit polarity and continuity.
Department of DAS Oregon department that is the owner of the building under Administrative Services consideration, or acts as the Owner on behalf of other state agencies.
DAS Electrical Standards -- The Owner's Electrical Standard as published elsewhere in the overall construction standard. The Electrical Standard is considered to be an integral part of the Security Standard.
Digital Video DVMS A digitally recorded closed -circuit television system that Management System records activity based pre-selected parameters.
Elevator Access Control EAC An enclosure associated with an elevator or bank of elevators Cabinet whose sole function is to support elevator control and floor tracking.
Electronic Latch EL Electronic latch
Global programming -- Programming functions which require the Lenel ACS server to process the commands and outputs.
Home -run -- The wiring practice where wiring is typically routed from its origination to final connection point with no intervening splices, terminations, or connections. Under this Standard remotely mounted ACS modules will be "home-run", and daisy-chaining will not be used.
Images Per Second IPS A rate of recording for an in dividual video input. The greater the IPS, the more information that can be delineated during review.
Intrusion Detection IDS An electronic system that can detect and report intrusion via System various means such as door contacts, glass break sensors, and various types of motion sensors.
Limited Energy "A" LEA Installation, alteration, maintenance, replacement or repair of electrical wiring and electrical products that do not exceed 100 volt-amperes in Class 2 and Class 3 installations.
Local programming -- Programming functions which require only the Lenel ISC to process the commands and outputs.
Operation and O&MM Manuals submitted by the Security Contractor/Vendor in Maintenance Manuals bound or software version that details the operation and maintenance of a "system" and its various components and devices.
Owner -- See Department of Administrative Services
Security Consultant SC A professional consultant contracted by DAS to provide services for the design and specification of security systems including, but not limited to, access control, digital video management, and intrusion detection systems.
Security SCV A Contractor/Vendor who specializes in providing Shop Contractor/Vendor Drawings and installation of security systems.
Hardware Consultant HC Consultant responsible for specifying all mechanical door hardware, door and frames and writing specifications for same.
Security Equipment SEC An enclosure(s) centrally located in a building that house Cabinet "head-end" and door controller modules and TBMs for an ACS system.
Security Intercom SIS A dedicated intercom system for the sole purpose of allowing System verbal communication for security related functions.
System Commissioning Cx The process by which the final system installation and programming is field verified and recorded.
Terminal Block Module TBM A group of wire terminals that are grouped together for like or associated functions.
Terminal Block Cabinet TBC An enclosure associated with an ACS door that houses the door's TBM and remotely mounted modules as applicable.
Uninterruptible Power UPS Typically a 120VAC input with 120VAC output that has supply integrals batteries that prevent the dropping of the 120VAC output during times of limited or no 120VAC input.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS The following are key terms and definitions that should be borne in mind by the Hardware Consultant or Security Contractor during the performance of their services. “Approved by DAS” shall be meant to indicate that a product or service substitution by a Contractor and/or Vendor shall require approval by DAS under all circumstances, and that “approval” is the final arbiter of the substitution request.
SPECIFICATIONS Specifications shall be written in the standard 3-Part CSI Master Format The Hardware Consultant shall modify the specification to comply with the requirements for the Project under consideration. The specification should allow for foreseeable conditions on the given Project. “Canned” or “boiler-plate” specifications are not deemed acceptable. A complete list of all abbreviations, symbols etc. contained in the hardware schedule or door schedule shall be included in the specifications. As an example: McKinney = MCK Von Duprin = VD Schlage = SCH
HARDWARE SCHEDULES The Hardware Schedule shall be written using the following format: Organize the Hardware Schedule into “Hardware Sets” indicating a complete designation of every item required for each hardware set. Number each hardware set sequentially starting with HW-1, HW-2 etc. The following is the minimal information required for each hardware set: Number of items such as 2 ea., 5 ea., 3 ea. etc. Description of item such as Butt Hinges, Exit Device, Kick Plate etc. Manufacture name such as McKinney, Schlage, Pemko etc. Abbreviations for the manufacture will be acceptable if a table showing the manufactures and related abbreviations is included. Manufactures catalog number including associated dimensions if applicable. Examples are as follows: TA2714 4 ½ X 4 ½ NRP 4041 (EDA) 98EO Style such as Rhodes, or trim styles such as Dummy Trim (DT) etc. Ratings or listing such are UL or Fire Rated. Finish for each item such as 626, or 613 etc. Related equipment that may be provided by other divisions and integrated with door hardware such as power supplies or Auto Operators.
DOOR SCHEDULES A separate door schedule will be included with every Project. It should be listed in table form in sequential order by door number starting with the door number in the left column and move from left to right for the column headings. The associated detail will be listed below each heading in a row. Door Schedules to include the following information at a minimum:
Door Number-Double doors should use the same door number and differentiate between the two doors using a letter such as A and B. Our preferred method of labeling doors is as follows: Basement-Sequential numbering starting at B-001. As an example B-001, B-002, B-003 etc. First Floor-Sequential numbering starting at 1-001. As an example 1-001, 1-002A, 1-002B, 1-003 etc. Second Floor-Sequential numbering starting at 2-001. As an example 2-001, 2-002, 2-003A, 2- 003B etc. Third Floor-Sequential numbering starting at 3-001. As an example 3-001, 3-002A, 3002B, 3-003 etc. Room Name: Shall be coordinated with the perspective tenant as the floor plans will become reference information long after the construction Project is complete and the tenant likes to have this as accurate as possible with the activity that may occur in the room Door size and type: Door Size-An example is 3’-0” x 7’-0” x 1 ¾” Door type-This is typically a letter that references a door detail illustration showing how the door physically appears. Door Handing: RH-Right Hand LH-Left Hand LHR-Left Hand Reverse Bevel RHR-Right Hand Reverse Bevel Door Material-Such as Wood (WD) or Hollow Metal (HM). This may also indicate using an existing door such as EX-WD meaning existing wood door or sometimes just EXISTING. Door Finish-Paint (PT) or Stain (ST) etc. Frame Type-Hollow Metal (HM) or Wood (WD) etc. If there is more than one frame size this may be indicated here by detail number. As an example (See A2.3) would reference a detail giving us more information or direction. Frame Finish-Same Door Finish above. Hardware Group-This will reference the Hardware Schedule such as HW-1 or HW-2 etc. There may or may not be several doors using the same hardware group. Ratings to apply to door/frame such as 60min or 120min etc. Notes-These usually refer to keynotes (keynote 12, keynote 6, etc.) or detail sheets (A1.3).
HARDWARE COORDINATION Door hardware suppliers’ responsibilities include:
Inform Contractor promptly of estimated times and dates or any future changes that will be required to process and deliver all hardware and to perform other Work associated with furnishing door hardware so the Contractor may include this data in the construction schedule. Assist Contractor in the coordination of any related equipment that may be part of or integrated with the hardware supplied such as power supplies required for electro-mechanical locking hardware or door operators. Contractor responsibilities include: Coordinate delivery and installation of all door hardware to include coordination between Access Control Vendor, Auto Operator Vendor, and any other related equipment installed at or near a door opening. Provide submittals and material data to Owner’s Representative for review and comment in a timely manner during Construction Document review, and any requested changes during construction. Submittals shall clearly identify model, type, size, and operation of requested hardware for review. Coordinate “Request for Information” (RFI) responses between Subcontractors and Owner’s Representative. Coordinate with Owner’s Representative for any access needs in advance to ensure needs can be met. Keys and keycards take a minimum of 3 days advance notice to process, and in some cases may take longer. If working in an occupied building, access approval in the form of background checks may be required by others which typically adds time to the notice requirements.
WARRANTY The warranty period shall consist of two parts. The first shall be the labor warranty, and the second shall be the equipment/material warranty. Warranty shall not apply to failures caused by acts of God or extraordinary circumstances beyond the control of the Security Contractor/Vendor. 1) Labor Warranty: The labor warranty shall consist of a one (1) year warranty beginning from the date of DAS acceptance. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall repair or replace without charge to DAS, any equipment or part thereof, which fails in operation during normal use within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance. The one year warranty shall restart from the date a replacement part was installed for the any labor and material required for the replacement of the warranted part. This shall not apply to failures caused by acts of God or extraordinary cir- cumstances beyond the control of the Vendor. Included in the warranty labor will be the following response times, based on a 24x365 schedule, for the Security Contractor/Vendor to respond to warranty issues.
DAS’s expectation of warranty service shall be as follows: Call back to DAS by a certified technician within one (1) hour of receipt of initial call at 24-hour telephone number. DAS shall have to call only one (1) telephone number no matter what time of day the call is placed.
2) A certified technician responds onsite with four (4) hours of receipt of initial call at 24-hour telephone number. 3) Equipment/Material Warranty: The Security Contractor/Vendor shall submit a warranty matrix with submittals, indicating the manufacturer’s factory warranty period for all equipment and materials used on this Project. The minimum equipment/material warranty shall consist of the documented manufactures warranty but in no case shall be less than one (1) year warranty beginning from the date of DAS acceptance. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall repair or replace without charge to DAS, any equipment or part thereof, which fails in operation during normal use for the balance of the warranty period, noted in the matrix above, from the date of acceptance. The one year warranty shall restart from the date a replacement part was installed for the any labor and material required for the replacement of the warranted part. Any repair or replacement that takes place after the initial first year of warranty shall have shipping charges applied to it. The extended manufacturer’s warranty shall not apply to failures caused by acts of God or extraordinary circumstances beyond the control of the Security Contractor/Vendor. The warranty matrix shall be revised at the end of the Project, and it shall indicate the start date and end dates of each warranty period. Submit with O&M/Record Drawings a Warranty Letter reflecting all pertinent information required above. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall perform all of the maintenance, servicing, removal, and replacement of defective parts, adjustments, and measurements to maintain the equipment supplied under this Contract to the manufacturer's specifications and requirements of the FCC for a period of one (1) year from the date of DAS's acceptance of the system. This shall be at no additional cost to DAS for those services requested for malfunctions reported 24 hrs. a day. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall have a technician that has been trained in and is competent to maintain the supplied equipment on twenty four (24) hour call at all times. When a malfunction is reported and immediate emergency service is requested, the Security Contractor/Vendor technician shall be en route to the equipment location to effect emergency repairs within four (4) hours after the Security Contractor/Vendor or their representative was notified by DAS. It is typically anticipated that DAS will attempt to perform all necessary immediate emergency services, but should there be services required that are beyond the capacity or capability of DAS, these services should be included in the warranty specification. Repairs or adjustments not requiring immediate services shall be scheduled based on the significance of operation and security at that time. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide the names of the persons who shall be the primary contact point for service, complaints, and general inquiries. Their names and telephone numbers shall be given to the Owner’s Representative. Each Bidder shall quote his/her charges for Work that does not fall under warranty. The Security Contractor shall include in the specification and bid form a place for the Security Contractor/Vendor to quote on the following service rates after completion of the Project: Between 0800 hour and 1700 hour, Monday through Friday. After 1700 and before 2400 hours, Monday through Friday. After 2400 and before 0800 hours, Monday through Friday. Saturday, Sunday, and holidays.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT The Security Contractor/Vendor shall test and demonstrate the Work is completed to assure that all portions are functional and adjusted according to the design intent. Provide all labor and equipment necessary to conduct these tests. Instruct DAS staff thoroughly in the proper operation of apparatus and controls at the time of substantial completion of each phase of the Work. DAS will perform follow-up testing to confirm results provided by the Security Contractor/Vendor as accurate and complete. Any discrepancies will be reported to the Owner’s Representative through the DAS Project Manager for correction. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall on completion of each phase of the installation, secure the approval of DAS and Owner’s Representative for the scope of Work covered during the installation phase. If permits are required for the phase of Work (the Security Contractor/Vendor having previously paid for and obtained the permit) secure a certificate of approval from the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Contractor shall return all state provided keys and keycards used during the Project. Contractor shall turn over all keys to secure the building, equipment or enclosures such as panel keys, window keys, hose bibb keys, and any other utility keys or specialty tools used for equipment adjustment or removal etc. Submit a final inspection certificate for all permitted Work to Owner’s Representative prior to request for final payment. Pay any and all cost incurred for inspection fees.
DELIVERABLES FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT Upon completion of Project, Contractor shall turn over the following: Operations and Maintenance Manuals (O&MM) Hard Copy Submit two (2) copies of closeout manuals prior to requesting final payment from DAS. Prepare data in the form of instructional manuals for use by DAS. Use 8½” by 11” manual format in 3-ring binder. Include table of contents, section tabs, and title for the manual. Manuals shall include manufacturer’s specifications for all devices and components. Operating instructions. Maintenance, adjustment and repair procedures. All necessary local permits, inspections, and completion notices. Electronic Files Submit one (1) CD-ROM with the above noted materials in a Microsoft Word format if available. PDF format is acceptable if this is the only format available digitally.
The CD-ROM shall be organized with a hyper-linked table of contents that replicate the hard copy O&MM. Record Drawings Include all of the following components: Hard Copy Provide hard copy Drawings in the following formats (this is in addition to the Drawings required at the Security Equipment Cabinet and EAC locations): Provide hard copy Drawings of the recorded layout including all aspects of the approved Shop Drawings including: Two (2) sets of “D” size Drawings, bound. One (1) set of ½ size “D” size Drawings, bound. Electronic Files Provide CAD electronic copies of all the Drawings in the following formats on CD-ROM: DWG files saved for AutoCAD 2000 or later. Drawing Requirements for Record Drawings: Provide a detailed floor plan diagram with the door numbers, detail reference and keynotes shown for each opening on each floor. Hardware The Security Contractor/Vendor must provide to DAS one (1) of each type of door hardware used on the Project to ensure a replacement of failed components in a timely manner. All extra hardware shall be deliverable to the building at close out of Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Hardware finishes shall match existing finishes if applicable on small retrofit or remodel projects. If this is all new construction the State of Oregon would prefer 626 or 26D (Satin Chromium on Brass or Bronze). Use trim styles commonly attainable (in stock) by most wholesale hardware vendors. Rhodes is an example of a common lock style D uses. Double doors are discouraged due to the difficulty in securing the doors. Doors wider than 36” are discouraged due to the weight and stress they exert on the frame and sub- structure. Doors Controlled by Access Control: DAS’s “Theory of Operation” for an access control system is, unless stipulated otherwise, for all doors shall be “free egress” at all times. “Free Egress” shall mean that no special knowledge is required to exit the door. To this end, the use of electro-magnetic locks (“maglocks”) shall not be used unless approved by DAS.
All electro-mechanical locking devices shall utilize isolation relays as well as diodes to provide for spike protection. Mortise Case Locks (non-electrified and electrified) shall have a minimum of 1-1/2” (an inch and a half) space “behind” the casing to allow for monitoring components at time of install or in the future. Vertical rod exit devices are not a preferred choice to use due to the increased maintenance and adjustment requirements. Vertical rods (concealed or surface) shall require approval by DAS prior to release of the Construction Documents. There is no typical lock style for Access Control System doors. Each application will determine what lock style is most appropriate. Panic devices shall use Medeco removable (IC) core cylinder housing to Facilitate quick replacement of lock cylinder. NOTE: (IC) cylinder shall be “LFIC Large Format Interchangeable cylinder that accepts MEDECO type of large format (IC) core”
The AHC shall determine any special considerations that may apply to each
Unique project and provide recommendation for modifications to the Owner. All changes shall be approved prior to final version of the Construction Documents.
Cylindrical door locks shall be commercial grade Schlage or Owner Approved Substitution. NOTE: key cylinders shall be a standard type “KIK” type of lock set.
The Tables below provide the basic models that may be used for each indicated application:
The following table provides basic models that may be considered for use for indicated application:
Table 5 – Non -Electrified Door Locking Hardwar e
Use Example Basic Model
Exterior Door, w/o Panic Bar Exterior accessed storeroom, Schlage ND80L, or Schlage electrical or mechanical room L9080, Trim and Finish TBD
Exterior Door, w/Panic Bar Emergency Exit Only VD 98/99 -EO if no entry required VD 98/99-NL if entry required Trim and Finish TBD
Interior Door, Higher Security File and high value storage, Schlage ND80L, or Schlage Level w/o ACS electrical, data (MDF/IDF) and L9080, Trim and Finish TBD mechanical rooms
Interior Doors Non -Critical Schl age lever handle HD Commercial Series, Function, Trim, and Finish TBD
Panic devices shall use Medeco removable (IC) core cylinder housing to Facilitate quick replacement of lock cylinder. NOTE: Mortice/rim cylinders shall be a (IC) cylinder “LFIC Large Format Interchangeable cylinder that accepts MEDECO type of large format (IC) core”
The Authority Having Jurisdiction shall determine any special considerations that may apply to each unique project and provide recommendation for modifications to DAS. All changes shall be approved prior to final version of the Construction Documents.
Table 6 – Electrified Door Locking Hardware
Use Example Basic Model
Exterior Door, w/o Panic Bar Card In/Free Exit Single Door Schlage L9080 Electrified Mortise with
Exterior Door, w/Panic Bar Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD E99L x 17 Series
Interior Door, High Security Card In/Free Exit Single Door Schlage L9080 Electrified Mortise
Exterior Door w/ Auto Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD EL99 x 17 Series Operator w/ Auto Operator
Interior Doors Card In/Free Exit Single Door, Schlage ND80LDEU Series Non-Critical
Stairwells Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD E9#75 Series, provide fail -secure or fail-safe as required.
All doors will be pre-configured to facilitate the use of future Latch Bolt Monitoring (LX) and Door Hardware Request-to-Exit (RX) if it is determined to be necessary. A “standard” installation will not have the LX or RX option initially installed, but it will be pre-wired. When a lock is specifically required to have this option the preferred method is to use the ACSI modifications indicated in Table 7, which provide a true monitoring of the latch bolt position on the mortise case or cylindrical locks. Rim “panic” devices shall incorporate the manufacturer’s standard LX/RX option. Hardware listed in Table 7 is non-standard and shall be used with DAS approval only .
Table 7 – Special Configuration Electrified Door Locking Hardware * To be used with DAS approval only
Use Example Basic Model
Exterior Door, w/o Panic Bar Card In/Free Exit Single Door Schlage L9080 Electrified Mortise with RX/LX options by ACSI
Exterior Door, w/Panic Bar Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD E9#75 Series w/RX/LX options by ACSI
Int./Ext. Doors w/ Rim Panic Bar Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD E9# Series w/RX/LX options by manufacturer
Int./Ext. Door w/Rim Panic Bar Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD EL9# Series w/RX/LX options w/ Auto Operator w/hold open by manufacturer
Interior Door, High Security Card In/Free Exit Single Door Schlage L9080 Electrified Mortise with RX/LX options by ACSI
Exterior Door w/ Auto Operator Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD EL9#75 Series w/RX/LX options w/hold open by ACSI
Interior Doors Card In/Free Exit Single Door, Schlage ND96LDEU Series, Non-Critical w/Alternative RX/LX options by ACSI
Stairwells Card In/Free Exit Single Door VD E9#75 Series w/RX/LX options by ACSI, provide fail-secure or fail- safe as required.
All keyed locks associated with the Von Duprin (VD) electronic door locking hardware indicated in Tables 6 and 7 shall be configured with a “night latch” function. Using a key will draw the latch back only and will not leave the lock in an unlocked mode. Interior Access Control System doors with auto operators can be configured with either method indicated below: Electric Latch Retraction (EL) device with panic device or mortise lock for higher security applications. Electric Strike (ES) for lower security applications. Strikes shall be VD 6000 series with the DS dual switch monitoring feature. Unless required by Code or at DAS’s request and approval all electric strikes shall be fail-secure. Style and finish shall be determined by the Security Contractor for each unique application. Latch guards are not a standard application however they should be considered if used in a retrofit and electrified mortise case lock cannot be used. Von Duprin PS-873 power supplies will be furnished by Division 8 and installed by the Security Contractor/Vendor. PS-873 power supplies should be specified for Electric Latch Retraction (EL) devices only. Electrified Von Duprin (E) exit device shall use the same power supply (Altronix) as other electrified lock hardware. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide a separate enclosure to house backup batteries and the Idec relays to monitor the following conditions: 120VAC Power Fail. Battery Fail. 24VDC Power Fail. Provide a separation barrier between the 120VAC coil relay and the 24VDC coil relays.
The PS873 shall have the following features: Battery Backup. Keyed Lock (key with Lenel E002). Provide with manufacturer’s standard two (2) –door control board. Provide an enclosure tamper as required elsewhere in this Standard. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide connection details for these power supplies in their Shop Drawings. Locate the PS873 power supplies at the Security Equipment Cabinet location under the following conditions: Actual wire distance does not exceed 175’ from PS873 to EL locking device. If the 175’ distance cannot be achieved, then the Security Contractor should determine an alternate location. All monitoring requirements shall be enforced. No more than two (2) EL devices shall be connected to each PS873 power supply. #12 AWG shall be used for all “EL” applications regardless of distance.
Non-Electrified Hardware: Vertical rod exit devices are not a preferred choice to use due to increased maintenance and adjustment requirements. Vertical rods (concealed or surface) require approval by DAS prior to release of the Construction Documents.
MANUFACTURERS The State has a warehouse that stocks certain types, styles, brands and finishes for most of the main door hardware. It is for that reason the State requests by brand name, style and finish so we have replacement parts and products on hand for replacement or repair of the door hardware. Parallel Arms: Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit with extra duty arms (EDA). Reinforce aluminum and metal doors and frames for door closers. Typical door closer would be non-handed and non-sized (4041EDA). Door Closers: LCN or DAS Approved Substitution. Floor Closers: Rixon or DAS Approved Substitution. Use common floor closers sizes and types normally carried by hardware wholesalers. Concealed overhead closers: Not be used unless approved by DAS due to maintenance issues. Auto door operator: Besam (Brand Name Exemption applied). Auto door operator Time Delay Module: Horton model C7220-1. Hinges: McKinney or DAS Approved Substitution.
Special consideration should be given to doors of non-standard height and width. Doors wider than 36” should have a minimum of 4 hinges. Doors over 7’ in height shall have 4 hinges or more depending on height. Pivots Hinges: Rixon or DAS Approved Substitution. Weather stripping: Pemko or DAS Approved Substitution. Thresholds: Pemko or DAS Approved Substitution. Flush Bolts: Ives or DAS Approved Substitution. Furnish flush bolts with dust proof strikes. Automatic Flush Bolts: Not be used as they create maintenance issues and restrict the door from closing and latching. If Automatic Flush Bolts are required by code it is encouraged to use Constant Latching Flush bolts in the place of Automatic Flush Bolts if at all possible. If they are not required by code use a standard Flush Bolt. Door Coordinators: Ives or DAS Approved Substitution. Push/Pulls: Ives or DAS Approved Substitution. Kick Plates: Ives or DAS Approved Substitution. Electric Power Transfers: Von Duprin EPT-10 or DAS Approved Substitution. Cylindrical door locks: Commercial grade Schlage or DAS Approved Substitution. Mortise Locksets: Commercial grade Schlage or DAS Approved Substitution. Exit Devices: Von Duprin or DAS Approved Substitution. Final Lock cylinders: Typically funded by the Project and coordinated by DAS. Unless otherwise instructed all hardware must be able to accept the State standard KIK knob or leaver locksets shall be Medeco 6 pin cylinder (IC) cylinders shall be “LFIC Large Format Interchangeable cylinder that accepts MEDECO type of large format (IC) core”.
HOLLOW DOORS AND FRAMES Hollow Metal Doors and Frames shall follow guidelines listed in ANSI/SDI 100 (Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames) unless otherwise indicated. Double doors are discouraged due to the difficulty in securing the doors. The following is recommended standards for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Hollow Metal Doors Doors shall be seamless and be a minimum of 18 gauge. They shall have a flush top cap, sealed at top to prevent interior door support ribbing from exposure to moisture. Doors shall be galvanized. Doors over 36” wide shall have 4 hinges. Doors over 42” will require the approval of DAS prior to inclusion in construction documents. Doors shall be reinforced for all hardware including locking hardware and door closer.
Door edge shall be beveled to allow adequate clearance. Provide clearances as follows: Between door and frames: 1/8”. Between door bottoms and thresholds: ¼”. Between door bottoms and floor: ¾”. Between meeting edges of non-fire rated pairs of doors: 3/32”. Follow NFPA 80 for allowable clearances with Fire Rated Openings
Hollow Metal Frames: Frames shall be a minimum of 16 gauge. They shall be galvanized and anchored in four places on each side. Anchors on the hinge side shall be placed as close as possible to the top hinge and the bottom hinge with the other two spaced equally between the top and bottom hinges. Anchor placement on the strike side shall coincide with the placement on the hinge side.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS Aluminum Storefront doors will require special address by the Hardware Consultant and Security Contractor for the following issues: All aluminum storefront type doors shall utilize a wide stile design. Minimum stile width shall be 5” to 5 1/8”. Doors shall use offset pivots and shall not be center hung without the approval of DAS. Coordinate with Division 13 and Division 16 to make sure wire paths are not blocked when electrical equipment will be placed at the door such as electric strikes, hardware, door switches, and Auto door operators. The ANSI door contacts need to be designed to be located on the top of the door. The Security Contractor shall determine exact location depending on the stile width and hardware used on the door. The contact should not exceed 8” to center from the edge of the door without DAS approval. The Security Contractor should provide a detail for this configuration. When double doors are required, a fixed vertical mullion shall be affixed between the doors. The desired method is to make the mullion non-removable, but should the building program require this functionality, then the Security Contractor shall assist the Owner’s Representative with the details depicting this feature.
DOOR ISSUES AND PREPARATION Hollow metal frames with metal doors shall have the door and frame prepped for an ANSI door contact on the top of the door with minimum space requirement of 2” from the door’s open edge to the near edge of the contact.
Each frame shall be furnished with a “mud box” over the contact cutout on the frame with a minimum of a ½” knockout connection. When existing hollow metal or wood frames with wood doors are prepared in the field by the Security Contractor/Vendor, a minimum space requirement of 2” from the door’s open edge to the center of the contact shall apply. When metal frames are used, they shall comply with DAS Standards. Silencers shall be provided on doors without weather-stripping. Drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. Provide plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. Care should be taken to coordinate any grouting of jambs with Division 16 and Division 13 to make sure wire paths are not blocked when electrical equipment will be placed at the door such as electric strikes, hardware, door switches, and auto door operators. When a door power transfer (EPT-10) is indicated in the door detail drawing, the door shall be prepared to accept the EPT as indicated on the detail including the “coring” of the door. The Security Contractor should coordinate with the Owner’s Representative to ensure that the door and door hardware suppliers are cognizant of the door preparation requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with local, state or federal code and except as otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) Recommended Location for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ADA and IBC.
QUALIFIED INSTALLER Hardware shall be installed and adjusted by qualified installers. A Qualified Installer is defined as one who specializes in the installation and adjustment of the pertinent door hardware with adequate and verifiable experience for the Project.
INSTRUCTIONS Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufactures instruction and recommendations.
FINISHING Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation with Work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the surfaces involved including under the hardware.
ALIGNMENT Door, Frame and Hardware Alignment: Set the frames, doors and hardware level, plumb and true. All components shall Work freely and smooth without binding, pinching or rubbing other hardware or surfaces.
FASTENING HARDWARE Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. Do not use thru-bolts unless approved by Owner’s Representative and/or DAS. Door Hardware Supplier to notify A/E and/or DAS if scheduled door hardware requires thru-bolting.
THRESHOLDS All thresholds shall be anchored and sealed to prevent water penetration as required in Division 7. Caulk shall be applied at the joining of the threshold and door frame for aesthetics and to prevent water penetration.
WEATHER-STRIPPING Comply with the manufactures instructions and recommendations unless otherwise directed by Owner’s Representative and/or DAS. In all cases weather-stripping shall not interfere with the closing and latching of a door. When adjustment is provided in the material applied, care should be taken to locate the fasteners in a position that allows future adjustment in either direction.
QUALITY CONTROL All doors, frames and hardware shall be of commercial grade and professional installed and adjusted to assure DAS of sustainable and trouble-free operation throughout advertised life of product and installation. Provide an AHC during Project at no charge to DAS to inspect installation and operation of doors, frames and hardware. AHC may be employed by supplier unless the installer is affiliated in any way with the installer. DAS shall have access to the jobsite to inspect the hardware for operation and installation methods and provide comment to the Owner’s Representative and accompany AHC and Owner’s Representative during inspection.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND MAINTENANCE General: Adjust and check each hardware item and each door to ensure proper operation and function. Replace anything that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application.
Where door hardware is installed and adjusted before full operation and balancing of HVAC in all spaces, return to each piece of hardware during the week of acceptance or occupancy and make final inspection and re-adjustment while HVAC is running to assure operation has not changed. Door closers and auto door operators shall meet ADA guidelines for given location. Cleaning: Return to jobsite during the week of acceptance or occupancy and wipe down hardware to make certain it is clean and ready for use. Maintenance: Instruct DAS personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by DAS personnel shall return to the jobsite to perform the following Work: Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. Consult with and instruct DAS personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures and discuss current and predictable hardware and door problems with DASs personnel. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units Door Hardware Schedule: See individual Project requirements.
END OF SECTION 08109 DOORS, FRAMES, DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING METAL FRAMING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES -Non Structural Metal Framing Systems RELATED SECTIONS - Structural Steel (i.e. Structural beams and columns) - Interior Non-Load Bearing Light Gage Steel Stud Walls, Except Shear Walls
REFERENCE STANDARDS Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, American Iron and Steel Institute. Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring, Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association. ASTM A-446—Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality. ASTM A-570—Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strip, Structural Quality. ASTM A-611—Specification for Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural.
SUBMITTALS; As required by Section 01002 Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Design, analysis and computation of section properties shall be in conformance with the Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members of the American Iron and Steel Institute. Technical tabulations of section properties and load capacities shall indicate dimensions, steel characteristics and allowable stresses upon which computations are based. Composite design systems shall incorporate a cementitious membrane facing attached to the studs through a series of shear connectors. Composite design shall not increase allowable axial loads nor allowable bending strength. Composite design shall improve deflection characteristics only.
Metal lath for cementitious membrane facings shall be of the type and weight for the spacing of supports in accordance with the Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring. All steel members shall be galvanized or primed with rust-inhibiting paint. All 16 gage and heavier painted structural members shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A-570, with a minimum yield of 50 ksi. All 16 gage and heavier galvanized structural members shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A-446, Grade D (minimum yield of 50 ksi). All 18 gage and lighter painted structural members shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A-611, Grade C (minimum yield of 33 ksi). All 18 gage and lighter galvanized structural members shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A-436, Grade A (minimum yield of 33 ksi)
PART 3 EXECUTION FABRICATION AND ERECTION Prior to the commencement of fabrication of framing, contractor shall submit fabrication and erection drawings to Architect of Record for review and approval. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on plans as “shear walls” for frame stability and lateral load resistance. Such stud walls shall be braced as indicated on plans and specifications. Additional studs shall be positioned to resist the vertical components as indicated on plans and specifications. At corners of stud walls provide three studs minimum located so as to provide surfaces for attachment of all interior and exterior facings. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points where indicated by plans and specifications. All framing components shall be cut squarely or at an angle to fit squarely against abutting members. Members shall be held firmly in position until properly fastened Pre-fabricated panels shall be square. Wire tying of framing components in structural applications is not permitted. Members comprising trusses shall be joined by welding. Joists shall be sized and spaced as shown on Drawings. Provide additional joists or “blocking” adjacent to exterior and interior walls, openings and elsewhere as necessary to provide support for ceiling construction as indicated by plans and specifications. Provide an additional joist under parallel partitions when the partition length exceeds one-half the joist span and around all floor and roof openings which interrupt one or more spanning members, unless otherwise noted Provide lateral bracing and bridging in wall, floor and roof systems to manufacturer’s specifications or recommendations. Track shall be securely anchored to floor and overhead structure as indicated by plans and specifications. Axially loaded studs shall be seated squarely in the track with the stud web and flange abutting the track web, and all studs shall be plumbed and aligned and securely attached to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks. Splices in axially loaded studs shall not be permitted.
END OF SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING METAL FRAMING SYSTEM
SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Interior gypsum board. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. Tile backing panels in first subparagraph below may be specified in this Section or in Section 093000 "Tiling." Tile backing panels. Texture finishes.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
RELATED SECTIONS Section 09111______"Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing System for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. gypsum base for veneer plaster and for other components of gypsum-veneer-plaster finishes. Delete subparagraph below if tile backing panels are specified in this Section. SUBMITTALS As per Section 01002 Submittals QUALITY ASSURANCE Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 square feet in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Install mockups for the following: Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. Each texture finish indicated. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wall coverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. SAMPLES Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch long length for each trim accessory indicated. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
WET OR MOLD DAMAGE Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Assemblies: Provide and install moisture- and mold-resistant glass-mat gypsum wallboard products with moisture-resistant surfaces complying with ASTM C 1658 and ASTM C 1177 where indicated on Drawings and in all locations which might be subject to moisture exposure during construction. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." RECYCLED CONTENT OF GYPSUM PANEL PRODUCTS Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than ______percent.
Retain first "Regional Materials" Paragraph below for LEED-NC, LEED-CS, and LEED for Schools Credit MR 5 or LEED-CI Credit MR 5, Option 2; before retaining, verify availability of materials that comply.
REGIONAL MATERIALS For LEED MR 5, Option 1 compliance, gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. For LEED MR 5, Option 2 compliance, gypsum panel products shall comply with following extraction and manufacturing criteria: (Distance by rail/3) + (Distance by inland waterway/2) + (Distance by seal/15) + (Distance by all other means) < 500 miles (800 kilometers).
SIZE Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD Basis-of-Design: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum offers two different product lines. “DensArmor Plus” incorporates patented embedded glass mats on both surfaces, providing improved water- and mold- resistance. “ToughRock” is a conventional panel with paper facing on both sides. Revise Section text accordingly to indicate the required Basis-of-Design Product. The basis of design for each type of gypsum board and related products is based on Georgia-Pacific Gypsum products named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: American Gypsum. CertainTeed Corp. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. PABCO Gypsum. Temple-Inland. USG Corporation.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus High-Performance Interior Panel or ToughRock Gypsum Board. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; Dens Armor Plus Fireguard High Performance Interior Panel or ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). Long Edges: Tapered.
Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock FlexRoc Gypsum Board". Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus High-Performance Interior Panel or ToughRock CD Ceiling Board." Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). Long Edges: Tapered. The foil backing on gypsum board in "Foil-Backed Gypsum Board" Paragraph below creates a vapor barrier. Verify limitations and proper uses with selected manufacturers.
Foil-Backed Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Core: [As indicated on Drawings] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm), regular type] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [Type C as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings]. Long Edges: [Tapered] [Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling].
Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level [1] [2] [3]. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; Dens Armor Plus Abuse-Resistant Panel or ToughRock Abuse-Guard Gypsum Board. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). Long Edges: Tapered.
Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant Panel". Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. Examples of “Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board” panels include; moisture- and mold-resistant type with moisture-resistant surfaces: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum's "DensArmor Plus High-Performance Interior Panels", which have coated glass-mat facings and comply with ASTM C 1658/C 1658M, ASTM C 36/C 36M, and ASTM C 1177/C 1177M; "ToughRock Mold-Guard" panels, which have treated paper facings and a moisture-resistant core and comply with ASTM C 630 and ASTM C 1396. Mold- resistant type; USG's "SHEETROCK Brand HUMITEK" panels and National Gypsum's "XP Wallboard," which are both paper faced and comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific-P Gypsum; DensArmor Plus High-Performance Interior Panel or DensArmor Plus Fireguard High-Performance Interior Panel or DensArmor Plus Fireguard C High- Performance Interior Panel orToughRock Mold-Guard Gypsum Panel. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), type C] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type C]. Long Edges: Tapered.
GYPSUM BOARD - TYPE C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive capability. Type C gypsum board has fire-resistive capability greater than that of Type X. Design designations of independent testing agencies indicated on Drawings generally determine product requirements for Type C gypsum board. Type C gypsum board from different manufacturers cannot be intermixed because the ratings apply only to assemblies identical in materials and construction to those tested. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor plus Fireguard C High-Performance Interior Panel or ToughRock Fireguard C Gypsum Board" or a comparable product by one of the following: American Gypsum. CertainTeed Corp. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. PABCO Gypsum. Temple-Inland. USG Corporation. Type C gypsum board is available in 1/2- and 5/8-inch (12.7- and 15.9-mm) thicknesses. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. Long Edges: Tapered.
GLASS-MAT INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both sides. Specifically designed for interior use. Retain "Products" Subparagraph and list of manufacturers and products below to require specific products or a comparable product from other manufacturers. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmour Plus. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), Type C] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type C] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), abuse resistant] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), impact resistant]. Long Edges: Tapered.
ACOUSTICALLY ENHANCED GYPSUM BOARD: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Multilayer products constructed of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound- absorbing polymer core. Basis-of-Design Product: National Gypsum Company; Sound Break or Quiet Solution, Quiet Rock. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), Type X] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [1-3/8 inch (35 mm), regular type]. Long Edges: Tapered.
SKIM-COATED GYPSUM BOARD: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured with a factory-applied skim coat. Basis-of-Design Product: Lafarge North America Inc.; Rapid Deco L5. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X]. Long Edges: Tapered.
EXTERIOR GYPSUM SOFFIT BOARD: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "Tough Rock Soffit Board" or a comparable product by one of the following: American Gypsum. CertainTeed Corp. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. PABCO Gypsum. Temple-Inland. USG Corporation.
Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X]. Edges: Manufacturer's standard edges.
GLASS-MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensGlass Sheathing" or a comparable product by one of the following: CertainTeed Corp. National Gypsum Company. USG Corporation. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X].
CELLULOSE FIBER-REINFORCED GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M Retain "Products" Subparagraph and list of manufacturers and products below to require specific products or a comparable product from other manufacturers. Basis-of-Design Product: USG Corporation; Fiberock Aqua-Tough. Type and Thickness: [Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] thick. SI (metric) module dimensions are by special order; verify availability with manufacturer. Size: [48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)] [48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm)] [48 by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm)] [1200 by 2400 mm] [1200 by 2750 mm] [1200 by 3050 mm]. Edges: Manufacturer's standard edges.
GLASS-MAT GYPSUM INTERIOR BOARD: ASTM C 1658/1658M, Fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus" or a comparable product by one of the following: National Gypsum Company. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X]. Long Edges: Tapered.
GLASS-MAT, WATER-RESISTANT BACKING BOARD: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensShield Tile Backer" or a comparable product by one of the following: CertainTeed Corp. Core: [As indicated on Drawings] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X].
Long Edges: Square. Edges: Manufacturer's standard edges.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273. Score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. Georgia-Pacific does not manufacture a product complying with requirements of the “Cementitious Backer Units” Paragraph below.
CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325. Retain "Products" Subparagraph and list of manufacturers and products below to require specific products or a comparable product from other manufacturers. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. CertainTeed Corporation; FiberCement [Underlayment] [Backer Board]. Custom Building Products; Wonder board or Easy Board. Fin Pan, Incorporated; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board or EZ Backer or ProTEC. James Hardie Building Products, Incorporated; Hardiebacker or Hardiebacker 500. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. Thickness: [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] [As indicated]. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. According to the 2006 International Building Code, water-resistant gypsum backing board is not permitted for use as a backing board for tile in tub and shower areas or as wall board or ceiling panels in shower areas. Edges: Manufacturer's standard edges.
INTERIOR TRIM: ASTM C 1047. Material: [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet] [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc] [Plastic] [Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet]. Shapes: Corner bead. Bullnose bead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. Expansion (control) joint. Curved-Edge Corner bead: With notched or flexible flanges.
EXTERIOR TRIM: ASTM C 1047. Material: [Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc]. Shapes: Corner bead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening.
ALUMINUM TRIM Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: Fry Reglet Corp. Gordon, Incorporated. Pittcon Industries.
ALUMINUM TRIM [combine with above?] Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. Finish: [Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified]
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
JOINT TAPE Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Soffit: Fiberglass mesh.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wallboard: 10-by-10 fiberglass meh. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 fiberglass mesh. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
PREFILLING At open joints [, rounded or beveled panel edges,] and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Setting Compound or ToughRock Sandable Setting Compound.
EMBEDDING AND FIRST COAT For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use [setting-type taping] [drying- type, all-purpose] compound. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Setting Compound or ToughRock Sandable Setting Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix All-Purpose Joint Compound. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
FILL COAT For second coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping] [drying-type, all-purpose] compound. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Setting Compound or ToughRock Sandable Setting Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix All-Purpose Joint Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix Topping Joint Compound.
FINISH COAT For third coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping] [drying-type, all-purpose] compound. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Setting Compound or ToughRock Sandable Setting Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix All-Purpose Joint Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix Topping Joint Compound.
SKIM COAT For final coat of Level 5 finish, use [setting-type, sandable topping compound] [drying-type, all-purpose compound] [high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish].
Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Setting Compound or ToughRock Sandable Setting Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix All-Purpose Joint Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix Topping Joint Compound.
JOINT COMPOUND FOR EXTERIOR SOFFIT APPLICATIONS Georgia-Pacific Gypsum does not recommend use of its sandable compounds for exterior applications. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Setting Compound." Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
JOINT COMPOUND FOR TILE BACKING PANELS Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS If required, insert joint treatment products designed for use with mold-resistant gypsum board products such as ProForm XP by National Gypsum Company or Rapid Set by CTS Cement Manufacturing. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
LAMINATING ADHESIVE Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of [50]
STEEL DRILL SCREWS: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS: ASTM C 665. Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED ASSEMBLIES Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre consumer recycled content not less than _ percent.
ACCOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANT Manufacturer's standard nonfat, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. Pecora Corporation; [AC-20 FTR] [AIS-919]. Specified Technologies, Incorporated; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Retain first subparagraph below if required for LEED-NC, LEED-CI, or LEED-CS Credit IEQ 4.1. VOC content limit is that for architectural sealants. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of [250]
THERMAL INSULATION As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
VAPOR RETARDER As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
TEXTURE PRIMER As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
POLYSTYRENE AGGREGATE CEILING FINISH Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum “Tough Rock Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene”; or a comparable product by one of the following:
National Gypsum Company. USG Corporation. Texture: [Fine] [Medium] [Coarse].
AGGREGATE FINISH Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum “Tough Rock Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite” or a comparable product by one of the following: CertainTeed Corp. USG Corporation. Coordinate texture requirements with products retained or inserted above. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum product is not available in spatter knock-down finish. Texture: [Light spatter] [Spatter knock-down] NON-AGGREGATE FINISH Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. Coordinate texture requirements with products retained or inserted above. Texture: [Orange Peel] [Spatter] [Spatter knock-down]
ACCOUSTICAL FINISH Water-based, chemical-setting or drying-type, job-mixed texture finish for spray application. Retain "Products" Subparagraph and list of manufacturers and products below to require specific products or a comparable product from other manufacturers. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: International Cellulose Corp.; SonaSpray "fc." USG Corporation; USG Acoustical Plaster Finish. Application Thickness: [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] . Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Flame-Spread Index: [25]
Smoke-Developed Index: [50] [450]
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL Comply with ASTM C 840. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. Detail perimeter isolation on Drawings. See "Crack Control" Article in the Evaluations. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Retain "Wood Framing" Paragraph below for wood framing where fire ratings are not required.
Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
INSTALL INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD IN THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS Wallboard Type: [As indicated on Drawings] [Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated]. Type X: [As indicated on Drawings] [Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly] [Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated]
INGLE-LAYER APPLICATION On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels [vertically (parallel to framing)] [horizontally (perpendicular to framing)] unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. Usually retain first subparagraph below if vertical application of panels is specified.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
MULTILAYER APPLICATION Retain first subparagraph below for multilayer gypsum board ceilings. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face- layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Revise first two subparagraphs below if wall conditions permit economical use of horizontal application of base layer and face layers are laminated to base layers. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one C- furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. First option in "Fastening Methods" Subparagraph below is required for some fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Fastening Methods: [Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws] [Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners]. Insert specific requirements for particular substrate in "Laminating to Substrate" Paragraph below. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
CURVED SURFACES Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. INSTALLATION - APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS Apply panels’ perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
Do not retain first subparagraph below if perimeter relief will be provided by trim. If retaining, detail sealant in gap on Drawings to keep insects from entering above ceiling areas. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS - GLASSS-MAT, WATER-RESISTANT Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations indicated to receive tile]. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS ANSI A108.11, at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations indicated to receive tile]. Retain paragraph below if tile backing panels abut thinner board in same plane, or vice versa, and detail these conditions on Drawings. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. Generally, retain first option in "Control Joints" Paragraph below and show joints on Drawings. See Evaluations for discussion of control joints.
CONTROL JOINTS Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect of Record for visual effect].
INTERIOR TRIM Install in the following locations: Corner bead: Use at outside corners [unless otherwise indicated]. Bullnose Bead: Use [at outside corners] [where indicated]
EXTERIOR TRIM Install in the following locations: Corner bead: Use at outside corners. LC-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges]
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture [matching approved mockup and] free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
ADJACENT SURFACES Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non- drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
INSTALLED PRODUCTS Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
WET, MOISTURE, OR MOLD DAMAGE Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS
NOTE: The current DAS Standards for the limited amount of colors allowed in DAS facilities are not listed in this Section. Please contact the Facilities Space Planners for the current DAS Standards PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Surface Preparation Field Application of paints, stains, varnishes and other coatings Surfaces to be finished are indicated in this Section and on the Drawings. REFERENCE 40 CRF 59, Subpart D – National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. MPI (APL) – Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association. MPI (APSM) Master Painter Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Master Painter and Decorators Association. DEFINITIONS Gloss and Sheen Levels: As defined by MPI except this specification uses common names defined below rather than numbered levels: Flat: Gloss Level 1 Velvet: Gloss Level 2 Eggshell: Gloss Level 3 Satin: Gloss Level 4 Semi-Gloss: Gloss Level 5 Gloss: Gloss Level 6 High Gloss: Gloss Level 7
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS Temporary sign painting, temporary heat, & temporary light: Section 01004 Temp Facilities and Controls Fabricated steel shop painting: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. Joint sealants: Section 07920. Hollow steelwork shop painting: Section 08109 - Doors and Windows. Wood door factory-finishing: Section 08109 - Doors and Windows Acoustic system suspension tees shop painting: Section 09900 Painting and Coatings
Miscellaneous specialties shop painting: Section 10990. Elevator shop painting: Section 14245. Mechanical equipment shop painting: Division 15. Electrical equipment shop painting: Division 16.
ALTERNATES Refer to Section 01200 for possible effect upon Work of this Section.
COORDINATION Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
PRODUCT LIST Before ordering, submit complete list of materials proposed for use. Obtain DAS’s Authorized Representative’s acceptance before ordering.
COLOR SAMPLES Submit 2 samples of each specified finish, color, and sheen. Minimum sample size: 8-1/2 x 11 inches Sample substrates: For paint: Stiff paper, or approved. For stains & varnishes: Specified wood Obtain DAS’s Authorized Representative’s acceptance before proceeding with Work.
FIELD MOCK UP Before proceeding with Work, apply where directed each specified over coating on actual work surfaces; i.e. primer Provide mockup of each painting system in each room or area to verify color and adhesion of paint to substrate. Include at least the following: Walls: 100 sq. ft. Ceilings: 100 sq. ft. Doors & door frames: Cabinets: 1 (N/A) Simulate contract lighting during Owner’s Representative’s review.
Accepted mock up represents minimum acceptance standard for subsequent Work. Accepted mock up, in like new condition, may be used in Work. Prior to starting Work, adjust mock-up colors as directed by Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to DAS.
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE Submit affidavit from paint manufacturer's architectural service representative that products and Work of this Section comply with these specifications.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with legible labels intact. Do not open containers or remove labels until Owner’s Representative inspects. Store in suitable location where directed by Contractor. Protect against damage and contamination. Remove unacceptable materials from project site.
PRODUCT LABELS - MANUFACTURERS Acceptable manufacturers Miller Paint. Scuffmaster by Wolfgordon Ameritone Paint Company. Rodda Paint Company Fuller O’Brien. Sherwin Williams. Benjamin Moore. Each product container label shall include: Manufacturer's name. Type of material. Manufacturer's product number. Manufacturer's batch number. Color. Instructions for reducing when applicable. WORK SPACE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
Perform Work only under the following conditions, unless otherwise instructed by manufacturer: Maximum relative humidity: 85% Minimum dew point variance between air & surface temperature: 5 ºF. Minimum ambient air & surface temperature during application and until film is dry-hard thereafter: 45 ºF. Do not work: Where dust, air-borne particles, or insects are present. Where inclement weather may damage coating surface. With less than 30 foot candles of available light measured 3 feet above floor.
EXTRA STOCK Submit, in previously unopened containers, 1 gallon of each color of each top coat. Label each container with product-identification and use-location. Store on project premises where directed by DAS. PART 2 PRODUCTS GENERAL Products for each general purpose shall be of same manufacturer. Do not use products of different manufacturers over one another, except for shop prime coats specified in other Sections. Products shall be free of lead and mercury and must comply with federal VOC requirements; i.e. low VOC products Products shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of blemishes or sags. Products shall not exceed code-required flame-spreads or smoke-developments. GALVANIZED STEEL PRETREATMENT MATERIAL Manufacturer & brand: Amchem Galvaprep, or approved. OTHER COATINGS Products listed below in paint schedule shall comply with latest edition of Approved Products List published by Master Painters Institute (MPI). Copies can be obtained from institute at (888) 674-8937, or they can be viewed by computer by searching "MPI Approved Product List" and clicking-on "Index by Category". COLORS See color schedule on Plans. Manufacturers listed in Approved Products List are approved provided they can supply colors that match scheduled colors to Owner’s Representative’s satisfaction. MIXING AND TINTING Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Unless otherwise instructed by manufacturer, deliver coatings factory-mixed to jobsite. Job-mix and job-tint only when required by manufacturer. Mix only in clean, rust-resistant containers. Use tinting colors recommended by coating manufacturer. Where thinner is used, do not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or organic solvents to thin water-based coatings.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXISTING CONDITIONS Examine surfaces to receive coatings for existing conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality or Work. Give particular attention to primer coatings applied by other trades, and to existing coated surfaces scheduled to receive new coatings. Verify Contractor has removed door hardware, as specified in Section 08109. Do not apply coating over substrates which exceed the following maximum moisture content: Masonry or concrete: 12% Wood: 15% Gypsum board: 12% Prior to starting Work, notify Contractor about defects requiring correction. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Applying coatings to defective substrates indicates acceptance of defective substrate by painter, and painter shall bear all costs to produce acceptable Work, including re-painting entire surface (No touch-up painting).
PROTECTING WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS Protect against damage and discoloration caused by Work of this Section. Prior to painting, remove or otherwise protect any finish hardware, accessories, cover plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items. After painting, reinstall removed items and remove protective coverings. Do not dump waste materials, including thinners, into landscape planting beds, plumbing fixtures, or storm drains. Cover or otherwise protect paint storage and mixing rooms.
FIRE PROTECTION Take extraordinary care to prevent fire. Open coating containers only when needed. Keep rubbing cloths and oily rags submersed in water.
SURFACE PREPARATION General: Remove any loose material, dirt, dust, or foreign matter. Concrete: Remove excess form oil and curing compound Where necessary for coating-adhesion, etch concrete with muriatic acid solution. Following treatment, rinse thoroughly and dry. Allow concrete to cure at least 60 days prior to painting.
Masonry: Remove any efflorescence and other bond-reducing substances. Zinc alloy & galvanized steel: Thoroughly clean with solvent or pressure-wash with detergent in hot water. Etch metal with metal conditioner or in accordance with steel structures painting council specifications. Non-galvanized ferrous metal: Remove any rust, grease, oil, or loose scale. Aluminum: Etch with phosphoric acid, or approved. Wood doors: Hand-block-sand faces and edges to remove any handling marks or raised grain. Fill any voids. At any natural-finished doors, color filler to match wood. Other wood: Clean soiled surfaces with alcohol, or approved. Remove any mildew by scrubbing with trisodium phosphate solution, treat with bleach solution, rinse with clean water, and allow surfaces to completely dry before proceeding with remaining Work. Hand-block-sand surfaces to remove any raised grain. At opaque coatings seal any knots, pitch, and resinous sapwood before primer coat application. Fill any voids, including set nail and other fastener holes. At any natural-finished wood, color filler to match wood. Apply clear sealer-primer to any smooth-surfaced fir before applying any scheduled penetrating stain.
Existing surfaces to be refinished: Clean thoroughly. Remove any loose, scaly, or other defective film. Fill any voids. Sand any irregular surfaces smooth.
Remove any film gloss by washing and sanding. Seal any stains or graffiti with shellac. Touch-up any bare spots with proper primer.
COATING APPLICATION General: Follow coating manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply initial coating until surface moisture content is within limitations recommended by coating manufacturer. Where in doubt test with moisture meter. Except as otherwise specified hereunder, apply coatings with suitable brush, roller, or spray equipment recommended by coating manufacturer. Back-roll or brush-in spray-applied primer coats to assure coating penetration. Maintain brushes, rollers, and spray equipment clean, free from contaminates, and suitably prepared for conditions of use. Do not exceed coating manufacturer's specified coating application rate. Follow coating manufacturer's recommended drying time between succeeding coats. Apply finish coats smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps, coating pile-up, and skips. Leave any moldings and ornaments clean, true to detail, and without excessive coating build-up in corners and depressions. Where coating abuts other materials or colors, cut coating edge clean, sharp, and with no overlap. In addition to door faces, finish door tops, bottoms, and edges as specified below. If necessary, remove doors from frames. Tint each coat progressively lighter to enable confirmation of coat quantities. Sand and dust between each coat to provide anchor for succeeding coats, and to remove any defects visible from 36 inch minimum distance. Extend paint finish behind tack boards and other similar wall-mounted items.
Painted Work: Woodwork: Immediately upon jobsite delivery, prime all surfaces including concealed surfaces. Flat metalwork, including doors: Apply paint with roller or airless spray equipment only. Do not apply by brush. If, and when, painting door hinges such as on electrical panels, open and close doors several times after painting to prevent paint bridging across hinge knuckles. Roller-applied high-build coatings: Do not "move" paint with roller, and stop rolling prior to roller going dry. Remove roller marks by back-rolling, using minimum possible pressure, and rolling in 1 direction only. Transparent finish woodwork:
Immediately upon jobsite delivery, apply 1 coat of clear sealer-primer to concealed surfaces of wood, if any, to be installed at the following locations: Building exterior Within high humidity areas Adjacent to new concrete or masonry Adjust finish color where necessary to produce uniform appearance between adjacent matching materials.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Before proceeding with remaining Work, request Owner’s Representative to inspect each first-finished room, space, and item for acceptability. Immediately following application, wet film thickness of coatings may be tested in compliance with ASTM D-4414. At least 14 calendar days following application, coatings may be tested as follows: In compliance with ASTM D-4138, dry film paint thicknesses may be measured using a Mark II Tooke Coating Inspection Gage, or a similar precision instrument, designed for measuring paint coating thicknesses. Touch-up test surface, which will measure approximately 1 sq. inch per Test. In compliance with ASTM D-3359 Tape Test, coating adhesion may be determined. Recoat any Work which fails test.
PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING Remove any spills, splatters, and stains including those in paint storage and mixing room. Unless otherwise approved, refinish entire surface where portion of coating is unacceptable. Remove any waste materials, including thinners, from landscape planting beds. Including work of other trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by Work of this Section. Remove debris from project site upon Work completion, or sooner if directed.
PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK Post signs and install barricades where necessary to protect completed Work of this Section against damage and discoloration.
PAINTING SCHEDULE General: Prime coats specified below may be omitted where factory-applied shop coatings have been applied by other trades.
Prime coats specified below may be omitted from existing finished surfaces, provided existing coating is sound. Quantities of coats specified below are minimum. Finished Work shall be even, uniform, and free from cloudy and mottled appearance. Apply additional (4 minimum) coats of any deep or bright tone colors where necessary to hide substrate. Minimum dry film thicknesses specified below include prime coat and finish coats combined, but do not include concrete block fillers. Surfaces not coated, unless otherwise indicated elsewhere: Items having complete factory-applied finish Plastic laminate covering Joint sealants Factory-finished wood doors Finish hardware Glass Ceramic tile Acoustic tile Flooring Roofing Toilet compartments Chain link partitions Toilet accessories Instructional labels including fire-resistance rating labels Portions of existing building where no alterations occur
Exterior concrete: Exterior latex paint: 2 coats flat gloss (MPI level # 1) exterior latex paint (MPI product #10) Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils
Exterior galvanized steel: Latex enamel: 1 coat galvanized primer, (MPI product #134), followed by: 2 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) latex enamel (MPI product #11) Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils
All Other exterior ferrous metal: Latex enamel: 1 coat bonding primer (MPI product #107), followed by: 2 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) latex enamel (MPI product #11) Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils
Interior concrete block: Latex enamel 1 coat concrete block filler (MPI Product #4). (Fill surface pores. No pin holes permitted), followed by: 1 coat latex primer (MPI product #50), followed by: 2 coats eggshell-gloss (MPI level #3) latex enamel (MPI product #52) Minimum dry film thickness: 3.0 mils Interior concrete walls: Latex enamel 2 coats eggshell-gloss (MPI level #3) latex enamel (MPI product #52) Minimum dry film thickness: 3.0 mils
Interior gypsum board: Latex enamel 1 coat gypsum board surface sealer, (applied after taping but prior to surface texturing), followed by: 1 coat latex primer (MPI product #50), followed by: 2 coats eggshell-gloss (MPI level #3) latex enamel (MPI product #52) Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils
Interior ferrous metal: Latex enamel: 1 coat rust inhibiting primer (MPI product #107), followed by: 2 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) latex enamel (MPI product #54) Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils
Interior hardwood: Stain & varnish: 1 coat penetrating oil stain, (MPI product #90), followed by: 1 coat sanding sealer (MPI product #103) followed by: 3 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) polyurethane varnish (MPI product #74).
Interior softwood & MDF: Latex enamel: 1 coat latex primer (MPI product #5), followed by: 2 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) latex enamel (MPI product #54). Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils.
Custom-built wood casework: Wood surfaces concealed when doors & drawers are closed: 2 coats natural color wood sealer. Casework backs & sides against exterior walls & bottoms over on-grade concrete slabs: 1 thick coat paint, varnish, or sealer. No surface without some type of finish.
Exposed mechanical & electrical Work: Exterior metal, including Work on roof: Finish same as other exterior metal of same kind.
All other piping, equipment, & supports: 1 coat anti-corrosive metal primer (MPI product #79), followed by: 2 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) alkyd enamel (MPI product #94) Minimum dry film thickness: 4 mils
Duct work: 1 coat galvanized primer, (MPI product #134), followed by: 2 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) latex enamel (MPI product #11). Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils.
Pipe & duct covering: 1 coat flat gloss (MPI Level #1) latex dry-fall paint (MPI product #118).
Electrical conduit: 1 coat galvanized primer (MPI product #134), followed by: 2 coats semi-gloss (MPI level #5) latex enamel (MPI product #94) Minimum dry film thickness: 4.0 mils
END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS
SECTION 10170 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY Work Includes: Solid plastic toilet compartments, floor mounted and head rail braced. Solid plastic urinal screens, wall mounted with floor mounted pilaster brace. Attachment hardware.
Related Sections: Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and plates within walls for partition attachment. Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories: Coordinate compartment installation with Subsequent accessory installation.
REFERENCES ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
SUBMITTALS Product data. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: Recycled Content: indicate percentage of pre-consumer and postconsumer recycled content per unit of product. Submit environmental data in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM E2129 for products provided under work of this Section.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals Submittals: The marking system indicated below is intended to provide assistance in identification of products for making subsequent decisions as to handling, recycling, or disposal. Verify plastic products to be incorporated into the Project are labeled in accordance with ASTM D1972. Where products are not labeled, provide product data indicating polymeric information in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE). Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE). Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE). Type 5: Polypropylene (PP). Type 6: Polystyrene (PS). Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of toilet compartment door and hardware.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Solid plastic compartments and screens: water resistant; graffiti resistant; nonabsorbent; with plastic face sheets permanently fused to plastic core; 1” thick panels unless otherwise indicated. Recycled Content: Minimum 20 percent post-consumer recycled content. Recycled Content: Minimum [5] [10] [xxxx] percent post-consumer recycled content, or minimum [20] [40] [xxxx] percent pre-consumer recycled content at contractor’s option.
ATTACHMENTS Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type. Wall Mounting Brackets: Continuous, full height, [aluminum] [stainless steel] [heavy duty plastic] [xxxx]. in accordance with toilet compartment manufacturer's instructions. Hardware: Chrome plated non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; black anodized aluminum door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper, [xxxx]. FFABRICATION Solid Plastic: 1/4 inch radius beveled edges. Hardware and Attachments: Pre-drilled by manufacturer; provide for protection of dissimilar metals. Floor Mounted Anchorage: Corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. FINISHES Compartments and Screens: Color as selected by Owner’s Authorized Representative from manufacturer’s standard colors. Pilaster Shoes: Color to match core of solid plastic compartments and screens.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. Verify correct location or built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. Report in writing to Owner’s Authorized Representative prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, level, and square in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. Install adjacent components for consistency of line and plane. Maintain 1/2 inch space between wall and panels, and between wall and pilasters. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve tamperproof bolts and nuts. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls and anchored to floor in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to suit supporting wall construction. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. Equip each door with hinges, one door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors, not exceeding 1/4 inch. Provide hardware at handicapped toilet with operating hardware complying with ANSI A117.1.
CONSTRUCTION Interface with Other Work: Coordinate placement of support framing and anchors in walls.
Site Tolerances: Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.
ADJUSTING Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch.
In Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched. Out Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to gently return doors to closed position. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
END OF SECTION 10170 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 10171 TOILET COMPARTMENTS & URINAL SCREENS
PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This section specifies; metal, solid phenolic, solid polyethylene, toilet partitions, and urinal screens, and entrance screens.
RELATED WORK Section 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS: Overhead structural steel supports for ceiling hung pilasters - SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES: Color of baked enamel finish - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES: Grab bars and toilet tissue holders
SUBMITTALS Submit in accordance with Sections for SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. Samples: Prime coat of paint on 150 mm (six-inch) square of metal panel with baked enamel finish coat over half of panel. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Specified items indicating all hardware and fittings, material, finish, and latching. Shop Drawings: Construction details at 1/2 scale, showing installation details, anchoring and leveling devices. Manufacturer's certificate, attesting that zinc-coatings conform to specified requirements.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): FF-B-575C Bolt, Hexagon and Square. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines for Products Containing Recovered Materials. Commercial Item Descriptions (CID): A-A-1925 Shield, Expansion (Nail Anchors). A-A-60003 Partitions, Toilet, Complete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS TOILET PARTITIONS Water resistant; graffiti resistant; non-absorbent; Class C flame spread rating. Conform to Federal. CID A-A-60003, except as modified herein. Fabricate to dimensions shown or specified. Finishes Finish 1 (baked enamel) on steel doors, pilasters, and enclosure panels except those adjacent to urinals and as specified. Finish 3 (stainless steel) on panel of enclosure panels adjacent to urinals.
STANDARD TOILET ENCLOSURES Reinforce panels shown to receive toilet tissue holders or grab bars. Upper pivots and lower hinges adjustable to hold doors open 30 degrees. Standard Keeper: U-slot to engage bar of throw latch. Combined with rubber bumper stop.
ADA TOILET ENCLOSURES Latching devices and hinges shall comply with ADA requirements. Upper pivots and lower hinges to hold out swinging doors in closed position. Provide U-type doors pulls, approximately 100 mm (four inches) long on pull side.
URINAL SCREENS Type III, Style E (wall hung), finish 2 or 3. With integral flanges and continuous, full height wall anchor plate. Option: Full height U-Type bracket. Wall anchor plate drilled for 4 anchors on both sides of screen. Screen 600 mm (24 inches) wide and 1060 mm (42 inches high).
ROOM ENTRANCE SCREENS Type II, Style B, (ceiling hung) style A (Floor supported), style C (Overhead Braced), Style E (Floor-to-ceiling Post Supported). Self-closing doors swinging into the toilet room.
Provide door pull on pull side and flat stainless steel push plate 250 mm by 70 mm (10 inches by 2-3/4 inches) with beveled ground edges, locate 1200 mm (four feet) above floor. Provide door stop with rubber bumper on pilaster opposite pull. Where doors open against wall, provide rubber tipped bumpers having a three inch projection, at point of contact of top edge of door. Finish the same as toilet enclosures.
FASTENERS Partition Fasteners: CID A-A-60003. Use expansion bolts, CID A-A-60003, for anchoring to solid masonry or concrete. Use toggle bolts, CID A-A-60003, for anchoring to hollow masonry or stud framed walls. Use steel bolts FS-B-575, for anchoring pilasters to overhead steel supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install in rigid manner, straight, plumb and with all horizontal lines level. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting in finish work. Use hex-bolts for through-bolting. Adjust hardware and leave in freely working order. Clean finished surfaces and leave free of imperfections.
PANELS AND PILASTERS Support panels, except urinal screens, and pilaster abutting building walls near top and bottom by stirrup supports secured to partitions with through-bolts. Secure stirrups to walls with two suitable anchoring devices for each stirrup. Secure panels to faces of pilaster near top and bottom with stirrup supports, through-bolted to panels and machine screwed to each pilaster. Secure edges of panels to edges of pilasters near top and bottom with "U" shaped brackets. Where overhead braced, secure pilasters to building walls by head rails clamped on or set into top of each pilaster. Secure clamps to pilasters with two through-bolts to each clamp. When head rails are set into pilasters, through-bolt them to the pilasters. Support head rails on wall flange fittings secured to building walls with minimum of two anchor bolts to each flange fitting.
URINAL SCREENS Anchor urinal screen flange to walls with minimum of four bolts both side of panel. Space anchors at top and bottom and equally in between.
END OF SECTION 10171 TOILET COMPARTMENTS & URINAL SCREENS
SECTION 10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY Corner guard system for wall protection
SECTION INCLUDES Stainless steel, PVC, rubber and plastic corner guard systems or approved equals.
SUBMITTALS Product data for each type of corner guard specified. Three (3) each full size profiles, 6" long samples of each type corner guard indicated. Cleaning and maintenance instructions.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite and store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment
WARRANTY Standard CAP limited lifetime warranty against material and manufacturing defects.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Acceptable manufacturer used as design standard: Cap Industries, Inc. Substitutions: Under the provisions of Section 01600. Provide all corner guard from a single source.
MATERIALS Stainless Steel: Corner guards shall be manufactured from Type 304, 16 gauge stainless steel. PVC, (Poly Vinyl Chloride) single length extruded pieces. Rubber – Synthetic or natural material based.
COMPONENTS Attachment options: Field applied heavy duty construction adhesive. Factory applied two sided tape. Pre-drilled holes for Phillips head screws.
FINISHES Stainless steel: No. 4 brushed vertical finish. All Others: Integrally colored from manufactures standard product colors, finishes
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine areas and conditions in which the corner guard systems will be installed. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of corner guards. Wall surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease and loose paint.
PREPARATION General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles.
INSTALLATION General: Locate the corner guard as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the appropriate substrate and Install corner guard level and plumb at the height indicated on the drawings. Installation of stainless steel corner guard: Surface must be dry, clean and properly sealed. Two sided tape: Peel paper from the factory applied tape and apply pressure until a tight fit is achieved. Cement on: Apply a bead of Premium Heavy Duty Construction Adhesive in a zigzag pattern over the back of each wing of the corner guard. Position corner guard on the wall and apply pressure until a tight fit is achieved. Screw on: Position the corner guard on the wall and attach it using the stainless steel screws.
Remove the protective plastic covering from the exposed surface of the corner guard.
CLEANING At completion of the installation, clean surfaces with a neutral based, non-abrasive cleaner: Ammonia and alcohol based cleaners may be used.
END OF SECTION 10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division Specifications Sections, apply to this section.
SUMMARY This section includes the following: Gravity held panels, steel clad composite core complete with bolted stringer understructure system as specified in this section. Gravity held panels, steel clad composite core complete with snap on stringer understructure system as specified in the section. Cornerbolt panels, steel clad composite core complete with understructure system as specified in this section. Cornerbolt panels, steel clad composite core complete with understructure system as specified in this section.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 3 Section “Concrete Work” for concrete floor sealer. Division 16 Section “Grounding” for connection to ground of access floor understructure. Division 9 Section “Carpet Tile” for carpet tiles applied over access floor panels.
DEFINITIONS Access flooring is a complete portable assembly of modular floor panels on an elevated support system (understructure), forming an accessible under floor cavity to accommodate electrical and mechanical service.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Performance requirements, General: Design, engineer, fabricate and install access flooring to comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing of manufacturers corresponding stock systems per test methods specified or, if not specified, manufacturers standard method. Structural performance per CISCA/AF: Provide access flooring capable of supporting the following loads, within limits and under conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing according to applicable procedure in Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Associates (CISCA) “Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors” referenced elsewhere in this section as CISCA/AF.
Floor panels, including those with cutouts, capable of supporting concentrated design loads of the following magnitude, with a bottom surface deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed respectively, 1/300 of the span and 0.010”: 1250 lbs. Pedestal assemblies capable of withstanding the following types of loads per pedestal, without panels or other supports in place. Overturning moment of 1000 inch pounds. Axial load of 9000 lbs. Floor system capable of supporting the following loads: Ultimate concentrated load without failure. Ultimate concentrated load shall be not less than the value obtained from multiplying the factor indicated below by the specified concentrated design load on floor panels. Failure is defined as the point at which access flooring system will not take any additional load. Factor 2.5. Rolling loads as noted below applied to panels through CISCA/FA wheel 1 with combination of local and overall deformation not to exceed 0.04” measured across panels 24” span and permanent beam set not to exceed 0.02” after exposure to rolling load over CISCA/FA path A or B, whichever path produced the greatest top surface deformation.1000 lbs. Impact load: A load as noted below shall be dropped 36” onto a 1” square indenter. There shall be no system failure: 150 lbs. Earthquake loads: Provide access flooring system capable of withstanding stresses produced by lateral forces of magnitude indicated in geographic zone of installation. Electrical resistance of system: Provide access flooring system with the following electrical resistance characteristics: 10 Ohms or less measured across surface of bare panel to understructure by test method as specified in Chapter 3 of NFPA 99.
SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications section. Product data for each type of access flooring specified. Shop drawings indicating complete layout of access flooring based of field verified dimensions; include dimensional relationships to adjoining work installation tolerances. Include details, with descriptive notes indicating materials, finished, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, understructure, and other data to permit a full evaluation of entire access flooring system Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturers color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of floor covering and exposed finish indicated. Samples for verification purposes in full size units of each type of floor covering and exposed finish indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is approved by the access flooring manufacturer for installations of the types access flooring required for the project. NFPA Standard: Provide access flooring complying with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain access flooring from single manufacturer. Coordination of Work: Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in under floor cavity to prevent interference with access flooring pedestals.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver access flooring components in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name and item description. Handle and store packages containing access flooring in a manner which avoids overloading building structure.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental conditions: Do not proceed with installations of access flooring until installation area is enclosed and has an ambient temperature of between 55 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit and a relative humidity of not more than 70 percent.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Mark pedestal locations by use of 10’ X 10’ grid on concrete sub floor so that mechanical and electrical work can take place without interfering with pedestals. Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until after substantial completion of other performable construction within affected spaces.
EXTRA MATERIALS Deliver extra materials to owner. Furnish 2% extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Standard field panels and understructure.
PART 2 MANUFACTURERS ACCESS FLOOR Subject to compliance with requirements, provide access floor by the following as the basis-of-design: ASM Modular Systems.
FLOOR PANELS General: Provide manufacturer’s standard modular field panels of size and construction indicated, that are interchangeable with other standard field panels, easily located and removed without disturbing adjacent panels or understructure device, free of expose metal edged in installed position with floor covering in place. Nominal Panel Size: 24” X 24”. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances with squareness tolerances expressed as the difference between diagonal measurements from corner to corner. Size and squareness: Plus or minus 0.015” or required size, with squareness tolerance of plus or minus 0.020”. Unless tolerance are otherwise indicated for a specific panel type. Steel covered composite core panels: Fabricate panels with 1” thick high density particleboard core, laminate to top and bottom face sheets of zinc coated sheet steel. Enclosed edges of core with upturned, die formed edge of bottom sheet. Provide panels with flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
FLOOR PANEL COVERING General: Cover tops of floor panels to comply with requirements indicated for color, pattern and material. All surface covering to be factory applied by the manufacturer of the access floor panels. Colors and patterns: Provide floor covering materials in colors and patterns as indicated below: Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors and patterns. Plastic Laminate: Provide for panels, High wear type, of grade indicated below; fabricated in one piece to cover each panel face. Choose 1/16” or 1/8” thick. Panels to be provided bare, with standard galvanized or zinc coated finish. Edge Condition: Manufacturers’ standard form of edge trim. For applied edge trim, use method standard with manufacturer involving mechanical attachment of edge trim to perimeter of each panel. Edging shall be interlocked with top sheet and captured by up-turned edge of bottom steel sheet. Panel finish to be applied monolithically to panel surface without use of any edge trims. Panel finish is bare; panel surface covering edge treatment is not applicable.
UNDERSTRUCTURE Pedestals: Provide manufactures standard pedestal assembly including base, column with provisions for height adjustments, and head (Cap), made either of steel or aluminum or a combination of both. Base: Square base plate with not less than 16 square inches of bearing area embossed for strength. Provide vibration proof mechanism for making a holding fine adjustments in height for leveling purposes over arrange of not less than 2”. Include means of locking leveling mechanism at a selected height, which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibratory displacement.
Construct pedestal adjusting rod of minimum 3/4” solid steel, and vertical column of 7/8” Square steel tubing minimum. All steel components to have manufactures rust prohibitive finish and precisions resistance welded. Fabricate units of sufficient height to provide required under floor clearance. Pedestal head to accept bolted stringers as specified below. Stringer System: Manufacturer’s modular steel stringer system, designed and fabricated to interlock with pedestal head and to form a grid pattern with member under each edge of each floor panel and with pedestal under each corner of each floor panel. Protect steel component against corrosion with manufacturer's standard rush prohibitive finish. Provide stringers which support each edge of each full panel where required to meet design load criteria. Bolted Stringers: System of 2’0” stingers connected to pedestal heads with self-threading fasteners accessible from above. Grid shall be manufacturers corrosion resistant steel and be capable of supporting a 300 lb. point load at stringers center span, with a permanent set not to average more than 0.010”. Snap on stringers: System 2’0” stringers connected to pedestal heads with a lock in mechanism to prevent lateral and vertical movement. Stingers to be removable without the use of special tools. Grid shall manufacturers corrosion resistant steel and be capable of supporting a 300 lb. point load at stingers center span, with a permanent set not to average more than 0.010” Heavy duty bolted grid: system of (choose from the following) 2/2”, 4/4”, 4’2’ roll formed steel stringers bolted to pedestal heads with a 1/4-20 fasteners from top of stringer. Grid shall be manufacturers corrosion resistant steel and be capable of supporting a 350 lb. point load at stringers center span, with a permanent set not to average more than 0.010” Panels shall be gravity held on understructure system specified. Bare panels shall be corner bolted to stringer less understructure system with one fastener per full panel corner.
ACCESSORIES Colors and Finishes: For exposed accessories available in, more than one standard color or finish, provide color or finish complying with the following requirements. Provide selections made by architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors and finishes for products and materials indicated. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts in floor panels to accommodate cable penetrations and service outlets. Comply with requirements indicated for size, shape, number and location. Provide reinforcement for additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements. Fit cutouts with manufacturer’s standard grommet sizes indicated or, where size of cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer’s standard plastic molding having tapered top flange. Furnish removed covers for grommets. Provide foam rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables and trim edge of cutout with molding having flange and ledge for capturing and supporting pads Vertical Closures (Fascia): Where under floor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls, columns, beams or downward slabs, provide manufacturer's standard metal closure plates with factory applied finish.
Ramps: Manufacturer’s standard ramp construction of width and slope indicated, but not steeper than 1 in 12, with non-slip raised disc rubber or vinyl floor Coverings, and of same materials, performance and construction requirements as the access flooring. Steps: Provide steps of size and arrangement indicated with floor covering to match access flooring. Apply non-slip aluminum nosing to treads unless otherwise indicated. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer’s standard portable lifting device of type and number for lifting panels with floor covering provided. Perforated Panels: Provide perforated panels with or without (choose one) operable dampers and 25% free open area in quantities noted below. Finish to be that as specified for solid floor panels.
PART 3 INSTALLATION GENERAL Install access floor system and accessories under supervision of the access flooring manufactures authorized representative to ensure rigid, firm installation free of vibration, rocking, rattle, squeaks, and other unacceptable performance. Set pedestal in adhesive as recommended by the access flooring manufacturer to provide full bearing of the pedestal base on the sub floor. Layout floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter to a minimum. Scribe panel assemblies at perimeter to provide a close fit with no voids greater than 1/18” where panels abut vertical surfaces. Secure grid member to pedestal heads in accordance with access floor manufacturers instructions. Thoroughly clean up dust, dirt and construction debris caused by floor installation, including vacuuming the sub floor area, as installation of floor panel proceeds. Extend cleaning under installed panels as far as possible. Cutting and trimming or other dirt debris producing operations will not be permitted in the rooms where the floor is being installed. Level installed access floor to within 0.060” of true level over the entire area and within 0.100” in and 10’ distance. General contractor and/or owner shall suitably protect the completed access floor from damage.
END OF SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING
SECTION 10440 BUILDING SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Building interior signage. Building exterior signage. Parking garage signage.
Please see the below DAS links for all building signage;
PART 2 PRODUCTS See https://www.oregon.gov/das/Facilities/Pages/ResServ.aspx
EXECUTION See https://www.oregon.gov/das/Facilities/Pages/ResServ.aspx
END OF SECTION 10440 BUILDING SIGNAGE
SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Fire Extinguishers. Cabinets. Accessories.
RELATED WORK -Field Painting. - Fire Sprinkler Systems. - Standpipe and Hose Systems.
REFERENCES NFPA1 0-Portable Fire Extinguishers. UBC 43-6 (ASTM E814-83) - Fire rated cabinets fabricated in accordance to measure, restore, perform. Americans with Disabilities Act 1990- Maximum 4 cabinet projection for corridors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for portable fire extinguishers. Conform to UBC 43-6 (ASTM E814-83) for fire resistive wall performance where necessary. Conform to Americans with Disabilities Act 1990 on maximum cabinet projection of C in corridors where necessary.
SUBMITTALS Submit brochure and product data in compliance with Section 01340
PART 2 PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Where shown on the drawings, and as the basis of design, provide fire extinguishers, cabinets, accessories manufactured by J.L. Industries, Incorporated. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER TYPES Water Mist Type:
Stored pressure type design stainless steel cylinder high gloss polyester powder paint all steel valve construction. Fire extinguisher shall conform to ANSI/UL/NFPA 10 standards and be ISO-9001/ISO-14001 certified. Conforms to test standards: CAN/ULC-S554 – ANSI/UL8 & CAN/ULC-S508 – ANSI/UL711
Dry Chemical Type:
Stored pressure type design drawn steel cylinder high gloss polyester powder paint all steel valve construction. Fire extinguisher shall conform to ANSI/UL/NFPA 10 standards and be ISO-9001/ISO-14001 certified. Conforms to test standards: CAN/ULC-S504 – ANSI/UL299 & CAN/ULC-S508 – ANSI/UL711
Carbon Dioxide Type:
Stored pressure type design aluminum cylinder high gloss polyester powder paint all steel valve construction. Fire extinguisher shall conform to ANSI/UL/NFPA 10 standards and be ISO-9001/ISO-14001 certified. Conforms to test standards: CAN/ULC-S503 – ANSI/UL154 & CAN/ULC-S508 – ANSI/UL711
Halon Type: Stored pressure type design drawn steel cylinder high gloss polyester powder paint all steel valve construction. Fire extinguisher shall conform to ANSI/UL/NFPA 10 standards and be ISO-9001/ISO-14001 certified. Conforms to test standards: UL-1093 – ANSI/UL711
Halotron Type: Stored pressure type design drawn steel cylinder high gloss polyester powder paint all steel valve construction. Fire extinguisher shall conform to ANSI/UL/NFPA 10 standards and be ISO-9001/ISO-14001 certified. Conforms to test standards: CAN/ULC-S556 – ANSI/UL2129 & CAN/ULC-S508 – ANSI/UL711
Wet Chemical “Type K”:
Stored pressure type design polished stainless steel cylinder high gloss polyester powder paint all steel valve construction. Fire extinguisher shall conform to ANSI/UL/NFPA 10 standards and be ISO-9001/ISO- 14001 certified. Conforms to test standards: CAN/ULC-S556 – ANSI/UL2129 & CAN/ULC-S508 – ANSI/UL711
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS Where indicated on drawings, provide J.L’s _ Series, model number ____ door. Door and trim to be fabricated from (cold-rolled steel, aluminum, and stainless steel). Color anodized aluminum, special painted surfaces and graphics as indicated. Provide cabinets with fire-rated option, if applicable. ACCESSORIES Fire Blankets and Cabinets. Extinguisher Brackets. Cabinet Alarms.
PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL VERIFICATION Verify Local building code mounting height requirements. Verify localized/adapted ADA mounting height requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS TOILET ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENTS Model numbers and descriptions listed below are the basis of design based on those of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Incorporated unless otherwise indicated. McKinney/Parker manufacturer’s similar products generally of equal quality. Other manufacturer’s products shall be reviewed item by item before accepting as an approved substitution. Soap dispensers shall be surface mount, stainless steel (SS), for antimicrobial liquid soap model # B-4112 (or approved). Paper towel dispenser shall be roll type, lever action with spare roll, auto transfer to new roll. Model # Kimberly Clark “N-Sight” 09706 Levermatic (smoked plastic front, push button access.) or Roll type, lever action with spare roll auto transfer to new roll. Model # Scott, 9700 Levermatic Smoked plastic front and push button access (or approved). Trash Receptacle shall be free standing, swing top, 23 gal. Rubbermaid (gray) Model #3569 receptacle with top model #2662 (or approved). Mirrors shall be SS one piece angle-frame roll formed frame, type 304 SS angle with satin finish. Model # B-290 series (or approved). Sanitary Napkin Dispensers shall be SS coin (25 cent) pull knob, 31 napkins and 22 tampons. Model # B- 282-25 surface mount, B-2800-25 surface mount (or approved). Sanitary napkin disposal shall be SS with full length piano hinge on lid, surface mount. Model # B-270 (or approved). Toilet seat cover dispensers shall be surface mount, holding 2-250 seat cover packets. Model # B-221 (or approved). Toilet paper dispensers shall be surface mounted twin jumbo 9” toilet paper dispenser. Model # B-2892 or approved equal such as San Jamar 4000TBK. Shall be mounted 22” from wall to edge and not over 55” high at top. Grab Bars shall be 11/2” diameter, 18 gauge type 304 SS, satin finish. 13-gauge type 304 SS concealed mounting plate, with four set screws on single piece cover plate. Uniform bar diameter around curves. Model # B-6806 series (or approved).
PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install as per local building code and American Disability Act (ADA) requirements
END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10900 CUSTODIAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL CUSTODIAL ROOM REQUIREMENTS For multiple story building, must be at minimum, one custodial room per floor Minimum size – 12 ft. length x 5 ft. width – or 10 ft. length x 8 ft. width. Mop sink – floor type basin Secured shelving for paper products and cleaning supplies.
STORAGE ROOM REQUIREMENTS There must be at minimum, one storage room on the ground floor. The minimum size: 400 sq. ft. The maximum necessary is 500 sq. ft.
PAPER RECYCLING DRUM STORAGE REQUIREMENTS Each building must have a storage room located near the loading dock/service entry. This is where the recycling drums are “staged” and stored. The minimum number of drums is 20 for building less than 100,000 sq. ft. The number of drums for buildings over 100,000 sq. ft. is 30. The storage area “staging” area must not block access to the entry or pathways. The dimensions of drums with metal handles is 2 feet 4 inches diameter x 3 feet in height. If drums are to be stored and staged outside they must be in a covered and secure area.
GARBAGE AND CARDBOARD STORAGE REQUIREMENTS Each building shall have an area for a trash compactor or dumpster for garbage. If the building is small and has no dumpster, the recycle area must include trash. The trash combined with the recycling area must increase to hold 55 gallon barrels. For a 65,000 square foot building this will require 10 additional barrels for garbage. Each building must also have an area dedicated to cardboard recycling. Cardboard dumpster is recommended.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Mount all products accordingly to comply with local, state or federal code and except as otherwise directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION 10900 CUSTODIAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 11005
FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA AND REQUIREMENTS Fall protection systems shall be designed and installed in conjunction with structural details and criteria generated by the engineer of record for anchorage to the existing roof deck.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding to be executed by certified welders in accordance with AISC and AWS requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Unload, store, and install fall protection components in a manner to prevent bending, warping, and surface damage. WARRANTY Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace fall protection components that do not comply with requirements or that do not remain functional within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 20 years after date of Substantial Completion. Special Installer’s Warranty: Written Installer’s warranty, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section. Warranty Period: 2 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS User manual: Manufacturer provided and published equipment list and system user manual, complete with inspection forms and checklists, and inspection log. PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install fall protection system in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers’ published installation instructions. TESTING AND CERTIFICATION Repair or replace any components and correct all deficiencies observed during testing or demonstrations, and retest as required by DAS, to assure compliance with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 11005 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 12005 OFFICE LANDSCAPE FURNITURE
PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Systems furniture.
Note: Please See the Below Links to view the below items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS See https://www.oregon.gov/das/Facilities/Pages/ResServ.aspx
PART 3 EXECUTION See https://www.oregon.gov/das/Facilities/Pages/ResServ.aspx
END OF SECTION 12005 OFFICE LANDSCAPE FURNITURE
SECTION 12486 FLOOR MATS
PART 1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions. Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.
RELATED WORK Section - Concrete Work. Section Unit Masonry.
REFERENCES
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Floor grid shall consist of a series of tread rails spaced 1-1/2" (38.1 mm) O.C. and running counter to the traffic flow. Maximum allowable load on FG Series and FGDP Series floor grid shall be 300 PSF uniform load. 300 lb. point load. Maximum allowable load on FGLP Series floor grid shall be 1,000 lbs. point load per tread. Floor Grid shall be FG Series, FGDP Series, or FGLP Series and shall be removable and replaceable without disassembly of entire grid and without damage to grid. FG Series, FGDP Series and FGLP Series floor grids shall be provided with carpet, vinyl, or abrasive per drawings with serrated aluminum (not available with FGLP Series) inserts. Floor grids shall provide a uniform sightline. Roll-up floor mats shall consist of a series of aluminum or bronze tread rails spaced 2” (50.8 mm) O.C. and running counter to traffic flow. Roll-up floor mats shall be recessed mounted or surface mounted. Roll-up mats shall be provided with integral ball and socket hinges or flexible PVC vinyl hinges. Aluminum roll-up mats shall be provided with carpet or vinyl or abrasive or serrated aluminum inserts. AMR or BMR Ultra grid shall consist of a series of aluminum or bronze tread rails spaced 1/2” (12.7 mm) O.C. and running counter to the traffic flow. Tread rails shall be welded to aluminum crossbars spaced 8” O.C. for AMR Series or Bronze crossbars spaced 10” O.C. for BMR Series. Welds shall not be exposed when the grid is in the installed position.
Aluminum angle frames for AMR Series grids and Bronze angle frames for BMR Series grids shall be provided. Floor grids and floor mats shall allow debris to fall to sub-floor. FG Series and FGDP Series floor grid tread bars shall be separately removable and replaceable without disassembly of all tread bars. FGDP Series floor grids having a width of 4’-0” or greater in the traffic direction shall be provided with a minimum of one continuous 2” aluminum I-beam support between each 4’-0” span. I-beam supports shall be welded to the frame. I-beam supports shall run perpendicular to the tread rails. FGDP floor grids with pan having a width of 4’-0” or greater shall be provided with a minimum of one 2” I-beam support leg welded to each I-beam support. I-beam support legs shall run parallel to the tread rails. Adjustable legs shall be provided for sloping deep pit drains. FGLP series floor grids shall be fabricated having continuous flexible elastomeric hinges enabling grid sections to be rolled up for cleaning beneath grid.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Obtain floor grid and floor mat assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000 Certified. The Manufacturer shall have documented management and control of the processes that influence the quality of its products. The Manufacturer shall have documented management and control of the processes that influence the quality of its customer service. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of experience in the fabrication of floor grid or floor mat assemblies. Installer Firm with not less than three (3) years of successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those required by this project and acceptable to the manufacturer of the system.
SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer’s specifications and technical data, including Material Safety Data Sheets, installation instructions, as required, and catalog cuts and templates where required to explain construction and to provide for incorporation into the project. Submit certificates, copies of independent test reports or research reports showing compliance with specified performance requirements.
Submit shop drawings showing layout and types of [mats] [grids] and frames; full-scale sections of typical installations; anchors and accessories. Shop drawings submittal shall be coordinated with concrete work shop drawings showing oversized recess for deferred installation of frame. Submit one (1) 12" x 12" sample of the specified system.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver floor mat system and floor grid system to jobsite in new, clean, unopened crates of sufficient size and strength to protect materials during transit. Store components in original containers in a clean, dry location.
WARRANTY Submit manufacturer’s warranty that materials furnished will perform as specified for a period of not less than two (2) years for floor grids and not less than three (3) years for floor mats when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Basis of design: Balco, Incorporated Floor Grid and Floor Mat systems; or approved equal. FG Series, floor grid; FGDP Series, floor grid; and FGLP Series, Floor grid, and frame. FM Series, floor mat and FM2 Series, floor mat and frame. BFG Series, floor grid, and frame. BFM Series, floor grid, and frame. AMR or BMR Ultra grid, and frame.
MATERIALS Tread rails: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5, or Bronze, ASTM B445, alloy 385 Recessed frames: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5; or Bronze, ASTM B445, alloy 385. Pipe frames and Surface frames: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. Serrated aluminum inserts: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5
FG Series or FGDP Series floor grid Tread rails: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T6; or Bronze, ASTM B455, alloy 385. “U” channels: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5.
FGLP Series Floor Grid: Tread rails: ASTM B221, alloy 6005-T6. Continuous vinyl hinges: Flexible P.V.C. Frames: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5; or Bronze, ASTM B455, alloy 385. Angle Frames: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5; or Bronze, ASTM B455, alloy 385. Locking Bars: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. Catch and Drain Pan (optional): Galvanized Steel, ASTM A653, G90, sheet, standard; or Aluminum, ASTM B209, sheet, optional; or Stainless Steel, ASTM A666, sheet, optional. Pan adapter: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. I-beam supports: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. Leg supports and adjustable leg supports: Aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5.
Carpet NOTE: Contact the DAS Space Planners Project Managers for current Product SXZ selections and purchasing Agreement Product Choices. Carpet shall be Polyamide 6 (Nylon 6), 3-ply air entangled, and unequal leg trilobal yarn, having an extruded denier of 1300, a final denier of 3900 - 4200, a total filament count of 171, and a denier per filament of 22.8; 0.300 inch thickness, 30 oz. sq. yd. solution dyed with a double coat backing of polypropylene and a proprietary blended Alathon coat fusion bonded to guard against fraying, delamination or moisture penetration] [heavy-duty, Polypropylene commercial matting yarn, permanently texturized 80/20 blend of 600/12 Multifilament and 595 Denier Monofilament, 0.300 inch thickness, 25.2 ounces per square yard solution Dyed with an extruded rigid polypropylene backing fusion bonded to guard against fraying, delamination or moisture penetration]. Continuous vinyl cushions, leading edge frames and fillers, vinyl treads (inserts): Flexible P.V.C. Abrasive: Two (2) part Epoxy combined with aluminum oxide grit. Fasteners, accessories and other materials indicated as provided by the manufacturer on the Manufacturer’s details and in the manufacturer’s installation instructions and required for complete installation to manufacturer’s instructions.
FABRICATION Fabricate floor grid and floor mat assemblies as detailed. Fabricate grid and mat custom cut sections as required. Fabricate floor grids as a series of grid tread bars spaced at 1-1/2 inches O.C., nominal. Fabricate a series of mat tread rails [______] wide, spaced at 2 inches O.C. and connected by vinyl hinges or integral aluminum hinges. Fabricate AMR Series and BMR Series Ultra grid as a series of grid tread bars spaced at ½” O.C. Fabricate floor grid tread rails [______] wide. Provide two inch (2”) aluminum I-beam supports on FGDP Series floor grids over 4’-0” wide. Tread surfaces shall be serrated, continuous crosshatched vinyl, abrasive, or carpet. Fabricate abrasive treads of one (1) solid or two (2) parallel solid line(s) of abrasive. Provide necessary and related parts, devices, anchors and other items required for proper installation. Provide components in single size where possible; minimize site splicing. Maximum single mat size shall be 100 sq. ft. (10’ 0” x 10’ 0”). Larger sizes shall be fabricated in modular sections. Fabricate grid units to maximum size recommended by the manufacturer for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where joints in grid are necessary, space them symmetrically and away from normal traffic flow patterns. Provide minimum number of pieces possible for frames that exceed maximum length. Provide frames with hairline joints, equally spaced, complete with corner pin, splice plates and installation anchors.
Frame, aluminum pan and I-beams shall be shop fabricated as an assembled unit for installation in the field. Shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. FINISHES Aluminum: Tread rails, “U” channels, lock bars, frames, I-beam supports, support legs, serrated aluminum inserts: Mill finish, standard. Optional finishes: clear anodized, gold anodized, medium bronze anodized. Embedded Frames: Shop coating of clear acrylic.
Bronze: Tread bars, tread rails and frames: mill finish, standard. Satin finish in clear acrylic on exposed areas. Embedded Frames: Shop coating of clear acrylic. Carpet: Specify color selected from standard colors available.
PVC Vinyl: FG Series or FGDP Series leading edge frames and fillers shall be black (standard), gray (optional) or brown (optional). Continuous hinges shall be black. Treads shall be selected from standard colors available. Santoprene: FGLP Series fillers shall be black (standard), gray (optional) or brown (optional). Abrasive: Specify color selected from standard abrasive colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Contractor shall verify that field measurements and recessed dimensions are as shown on shop drawings prior to releasing materials for fabrication by the manufacturer. Installer shall examine conditions under which work is to be performed and shall notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Installer shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
INSTALLATION Install floor grid system or floor mat system in accordance with the governing regulations, the industry standards applicable to the work and the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Work shall be aligned plumb, level, and, where required, flush with adjacent surfaces. Carpet and vinyl shall be positively locked into tread rails.
Anchors shall be spaced at 24 inches O.C.
ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION Inspect system components for proper fit. Adjust, repair or replace components not conforming to requirements. Repair or replacement of an individual unit shall be as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Advise Contractor of procedures required to protect the finished work from damage during the remainder of the construction period. Finished units shall be without damage. Units damaged during shipping or construction shall be repaired by the Contractor at the expense of the party damaging the material, in accordance with the Contract requirements. Protect installation from damage by work of other Sections. After installation of frame, install temporary filler of plywood in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and project is near time of Substantial Completion. Install grids and mats near time of Substantial Completion.
GENERAL RESPONSIBILITY Any variation from this sp ecification resulting in additional cost to any other Contractor or Subcontractor on this project shall be the sole financial responsibility of the Contractor for the work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 12486 FLOOR MATS
SECTION 14245 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL SUMMARY Section Includes: Supply and complete installation and testing of the hydraulic passenger elevators indicated on Drawings including cylinders, plungers, pumping units, oil storage tanks, controllers, guide rails, and entrances.
RELATED SECTIONS Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Utilities: Division 2. Elevator Pit Concrete; Cast-In-Place Concrete: Division 3. Resilient Flooring: Division 9. Heat and Smoke Sensing Devices: Electrical. Power and Telephone Service to Elevator Control Panel: Electrical.
SUBMITTALS Submit in accordance with Section - Submittals and Section: Deferred Approval Items. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings, indicate control, power and piping diagrams. Include dimensioned plan of hoistway and machine room and full height section through hoistway. Submit engineering calculations for the guide rail supporting brackets, splice locations, and jack(s) support beams and brackets. Submit a complete list of all items to be furnished and installed under this Section. Submit manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, shall be the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation. Samples: Submit samples showing full range of colors and textures of all finish materials specified including 2” x 3” sample of light-diffusing plastic ceiling panels. Maintenance Manuals: Furnish to the inspector prior to final inspection, one bound maintenance manual containing specifications and instructions for the maintenance and adjustment of operating equipment and controls. Include with the special control directions, any special tools or testing equipment required. Submit Project Record Drawings in accordance with Section 01720.Submit one (1) 24” x 36” reproducible vellums.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Work of this Section shall conform to the following standards:
American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators (ANSI) A17.1. The National Electrical Code (NEC). The American National Standard Specifications (ANSI) A117.1.
Qualifications of Subcontractor: Elevator Contractor shall be regularly engaged in the business of installing and servicing elevators of the type specified and shall have a local history of successful installations acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Qualifications of Installer: Provide a thoroughly qualified, trained and experienced person who shall be present at site and shall direct all work performed under this Section.
PRODUCT HANDLING Protect the materials required by this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the work form other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all necessary repairs and replacements at no cost to DAS. All such costs shall be borne by the responsible party.
WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed by the Contractor, installer and manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair/restore defective materials and workmanship of elevator work during warranty period. “Defective” is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, operation or control system failures, performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibrations, and similar unusual, unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions. The warranty period is for 12 months starting on date of acceptance by the State Elevator Inspector or 13 months from date of delivery of elevator unit(s). Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator installer for a period of 12 months following date of acceptance. Include monthly preventative maintenance, performed during normal working hours. Include repair/replacement of worn or defective parts or components and lubrication, cleaning and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation in conformance with specified service. Exclude only repair/replacement due to misuse, abuse, and accidents for neglect cause by persons other than Installer’s personnel. Warranties: Provide coincidental product warranties where available for major components of elevator work. Submit with maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: Phoenix Modular Elevator Incorporated. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT General characteristics: Type: Oil hydraulic passenger. Control: Electric-hydraulic passenger. Capacities: 2000 lbs. Speed: 100 FPM Operation: Automatic selective collective. Controller shall be non-proprietary type and provide any special tools and instructions for repair and maintenance. Relay logic controllers not acceptable. Car interior clear dimensions: As indicated on drawings. Hoist way Door: 3’-0’ x 7’-0’ clear, single slide entrance with approved “B” label, hollow metal. Door Operation: Car and hoist way doors, medium speed, power operated. Signals: Illuminated buttons in car operating panel, illuminated hall call station visible and audible “in-car lantern”. Special Features: Emergency lighting and alarm bell, automatic failure protection, Braille symbols and access compliance provisions, infra-red beam door re-opening device, inspection switch, and hoistway access switch and car-top inspection station. Travel: total travel distance (floor to floor) shall be as indicated in Drawings. Power Supply: Alternating current, 208,220,440 volts 3 phase or 1 phase, 60 Hertz. Dedicated Electrical Lines: Car lighting, 120 volts with lockable disconnect in machine room, see NEC E620-53; machine room and elevator pit; all ¾” conduit from nearest telephone terminal cabinet to machine room. Conduit in machine room shall be rigid metallic from disconnect to controller. Terminate in 4-S box, + 6’-0” above floor, cover of box indelibly marked “ELEVATOR EMERGENCY TELEPHONE”.
Car Frame: A car frame fabricated from formed or structural steel members shall be provided with bracing to support platform and car enclosure. Car platform shall be formed steel. Car frame shall be isolated from platen plate by means of rubber isolation mounts.
Elevator Cab: Interior car finish shall be high-pressure plastic laminate. Colors shall be selected by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Provide and install stainless steel handrail(s) in car per ADA. Ventilation of car shall be a natural draft vent. Drop ceiling shall have separate light diffusing polycarbonate panels.
Lighting: Provide LED light fixtures. Provide 4” high rubber top-set and vinyl composition tile floor as selected by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. (To be installed by others). Provide an emergency light and alarm unit approved for elevator use. Battery powered emergency units shall have a self-contained charging unit capable of maintaining a peak charge without damage to the battery. Provide flush mounted stainless steel car operating panel. (See Article 2.02, Paragraph H). Provide a car top inspection station with an “emergency stop” switch and with constant pressure “up- down” direction buttons which shall make the normal operating devices inoperative and give the Inspector complete control of elevator. Provide elevator emergency telephone.
Car Door: Door finish shall be solid color enamel or stainless steel as selected by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Pre-opening of doors shall not be installed. Doors shall be power-operated automatic opening and closing, connected to the hoistway door opposite by a movable clutch mechanism.
Hoistway Entrance Doors: Hoistway entrance doors shall be hollow metal, horizontal sliding type and shall include frames, sills, doors, hangers, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates, and all necessary hardware. Finish shall be solid color enamel or lacquer as selected by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Hoistway entrances shall bear “B” Label. (DO NOT paint over labels on doors or frame). Provide landing identification on the hoistway side of entrance doors. Stencil 4” high Arabic numerals 12” above the bottom and 12” below the top of the door panel. Paint color shall provide maximum visual contrast to background color. Guide Rails: Install guide rails for code standard “T” shaped steel for car and counter-weight guides. All bolts shall have a minimum of 2 threads showing beyond fastening nut.
Elevator Door Safety System: Infra-red curtain unit using beams of invisible infra-red light to protect passengers against closing elevator doors. Provide system by the following manufacturers: Electro-Mechanical Industries. T. L. Jones. Janus Products. Or approved equal.
Car doors shall have an electronic obstruction sensing, reopening device. Device shall automatically reinstate operation after blockage is cleared. Door shall be held open for normal cycle of seven (7) seconds and shall be reopened by beam interruption. Time shall be adjustable within control panel.
Car Operating Panel: A flush-mounted stainless steel operating panel shall be mounted in each car and shall contain all devices required for specified operation. Panel shall be hinged. Push buttons in operating panel shall be installed between 35” and 54” above car floor. Floor registration pushbuttons shall be metal with lighted floor Designation engraved and filled on each push-button. Emboss correct Braille designation on panel face immediately to left of each pushbutton. Emergency “stop” and “alarm” pushbuttons, mounted 35” center to car floor, shall be metal with tactile symbols etched into pushbuttons or panel face. Alarm button shall be on left. Stop button shall be key operated only. Provide door “open” and “close” pushbutton switches immediately above “stop” and “alarm” switches. Activated door “open” switch shall override automatic door closing circuit immediately, opening and holding door in full open position until pushbutton is released. Activated door “close” switch shall override automatic door hold open timer circuit only and immediately start door closing operation but shall not override door protection devices. Key operated switch in control panel shall control car lights. Switches For car lights, electronic door protection unit, and independent operation shall be operated with same key, but key shall not operate inspection switch. Key switches for control of car mounted equipment and special operation of elevator shall be installed in operating panel above highest floor button. Hoistway access switches and inspection switch in car shall operate with one key. This key shall not operate any other switch used for operating other elevator equipment or circuit logic.
Landing Requirements: Hall call stations shall be #16 gage stainless steel, satin finish, flush mounted, 42” center line to floor with a visual call registered indicator. Stations shall contain call switches, call registered indicator. Stations shall contain call switches, call registered indicators and fire recall switch when applicable. Provide push button or push button with key operated cutout switches. Key removable in “off” or “neutral” position only. Install lock cylinder in a way that will mechanically prevent rotation in mounting plate. Hall call switches shall be 6 pin key cylinders to match school keyway. (See Finish Hardware Section). Identify hoist way entrances, as to landing served, by permanently installing 1/8” thick metal plates on both jambs of frame. Plates shall be riveted in all 4 corners. Plates shall be centered 60” above floor. Etch plates with 2” high Arabic numerals and corresponding Braille symbol to left or below. Braille symbol and numeral shall be raised .030” above background.
At all landings, permanently install fire signs. Signs shall be mounted Above call station and read “In case of fire use stairway for exit. Do not use elevator”. Sign shall be securely fastened with rivets. Provide visible and audible “in-car lantern”, located on car door jamb, visible from proximity of hall call station, indicating direction of travel to persons waiting on landing.
Operations: Elective Collective Operation: Elevator shall be controlled automatically by means of push buttons in car marked to correspond with respective landings served and by “Call’ key switch at each hoist way opening. Momentary pressure on any button shall operate car, if all car and hoist way doors are closed. Stop switch and car push-button station, when in off position, will render elevator inoperative and which will enable attendant or passenger to stop at any point during its travel.
Hoistway Access: Hoistway “Access” switches shall be provided at top landings and bottom, if required. Emergency Operation (Fire Recall Circuit): Emergency operation shall comply with local Code and provide following: Emergency operation key switch at main floor, flush in wall, to return elevator to main floor with operating instructions etched on switch cover plate. Non self-resetting smoke detectors shall be installed at each elevator landing except main landing, to cause elevator to return to main floor if activated. Smoke detectors shall be tied into elevator controller but not into any other detection system. Smoke detector system may not be required in fully sprinkled buildings.
Elevator Controls: Elevator controls shall cancel “up” direction demands and return car to bottom landing should main motor thermal protective device actuate on an over heat or fault condition. Controls shall prevent re-initiation of “up” demands until all thermal protective devices are reset to normal positions or fault cleared.
Jack Units: Hydraulic jacks shall be supported on pit floor. Any space under jack base plate and pit floor shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout after installation. Jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift gross load height required and shall be factory tested to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. No brittle material, such as gray cast iron, shall be used in jack construction. Hydraulic jack cylinders shall be clean and free of all rust and debris. Twin hole less, twin telescopic hole less or in-ground jacks, as travel dictates. Power Unit & Oil Pump: Oil pumping and control mechanism shall be compactly and neatly designed.
Pump shall be especially designed and manufactured for oil-hydraulic Elevator service. Hydraulic pump motor shall have continuous ground to main slab. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10% between “no load” and “full load” on elevator car. Drive shall be by direct coupling. Protect motors classed as intermittent duty against continuous operation with a magnetic switch and overload relays of sufficient number and size and an integral thermal sensor. Thermal overload relays of main motor magnetic shall be manual reset. Protective operation of motor magnetic switch thermal overload relay or integral thermal sensor shall prevent operation of main device motor, but shall not prevent operation in down direction of elevator nor prevent normal operation of power door operator. Hydraulic control valves shall be multi-control integral valve unit, with 2 direction leveling “soft-stop” features and manual lowering control. Power unit assembly shall be designed and installed to prevent transmission of operation noise outside machine room. Piping and Oil Supply: Storage Tank: Storage tank shall be constructed of steel. Equip with a gate shut-off valve between tank outlet and pump inlet. An initial supply of oil, of proper grade, sufficient for proper operation shall be provided in installed. Oil tank shall be secured to meet seismic requirement of the code. Sound Isolating Couplings: Install sound isolating coupling in oil line between pump and jack, located in the machine room.
Muffler: A blow-out proof muffler, designed to minimize transmission of fluid pulsation shall be installed in piping between pump and cylinder. Hydraulic piping system shall be designed and installed without leaks. Hydraulic lines between machine room and hoistway shall be installed above grade where possible. Underground lines shall have a heavy coating of non-corrosive mastic and a double wrapping of PVC pipe wrapping tape .01” thick or a continuous flexible .02” thick plastic sleeve. Trenches shall be back-filled only after pipe installation has been approved by the site construction inspector.
Keying: Furnish to DAS keys for every key-operated switch, including hoistway access, inspection and fireman recall switch.
Telephone Cable: Install a braided shielded 2 conductor NO. 20 AWG telephone cable between car telephone cabinet and dialer backboard in elevator machine room. Conductors and shield shall be continuous between cabinet and junction box, installed in a legal wire way except for traveling cable. Shield shall be braided and one end grounded.
Traveling Cable: Traveling cable shall be in accordance with National Electric Code, Type E, EO and ETT. Cables shall be U.L. approved.
Elevator Emergency Telephone: Provide a complete and operational emergency elevator telephone. Auto dialer shall be programmed to automatically dial primary number and secondary number as specified by DAS. Telephone Company shall provide a dedicated telephone line to be terminated at main telephone terminal backboard in a RJ-11 jack. RJ-11 jack shall be marked with telephone line number and labeled “ELEVATOR TELEPHONE”.
PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Prior to commencing elevator installation, examine pre-fabricated hoistway, hoistway openings pits and machine rooms as constructed; verify all critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Notify Contractor in writing of any dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of elevator work. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR SYSTEM General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for work required during installation.
Excavation for Pit: Excavate for each elevator pit to accommodate installation of modular elevator unit; comply with applicable requirements of Division 2 “Excavation” Sections. Install modular elevator units plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel; anchor securely in place.
Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines and levels designated by Contractor to ensure dimensional coordination of the work.
Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration- absorption mounts, designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby to eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. Install piping connection between hoistway and machine room without routing underground where possible. Where not possible, cover underground piping with permanent protective wrapping before backfilling. Lubricate operating parts of system, including ropes, if any, as recommended by manufacturers.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of modular elevator unit for accurate alignment of entrances.
Leveling Tolerance: ½-inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. Finish interior walls at hoistway entrances and trim to modular elevator unit. Provide sill or finish floor in area of hoistway door penetration in accordance with plans.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each elevator installation and before permitting use of elevator (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests ad required and recommended by Code and governing regulations or agencies.
Operating Tests: Load each elevator to its rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over its full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature rise of pump motor (except submerged pumps) during 30-minute test period. Record failures of elevator to perform as required. Advise Contractor, DAS, Owner’s Authorized Representative and inspection department of governing agencies in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators.
PROTECTION At time of substantial completion of the elevator work (or portion thereof), provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs or such other methods or procedures to protect elevator work from danger or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period.
Provide similar protective measures for elevator units that will be placed in temporary service, including inspection and maintenance service during period of temporary service.
DEMONSTRATION Instruct DAS personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train DAS’s personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with DAS on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. Make a final check of each elevator operation with DAS’s personnel present just prior to date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION 14245 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS
SECTION 15050 BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL STANDARDS
Modifications to DAS owned buildings shall support building services, structures, and systems; conform to codes and be safe for occupants. They shall be cost effective in design, construction, installation, maintenance, and operation. For those reasons, DAS maintains and requires conformance to technical standards that exceed state and local minimum codes.
1.0 PERMITS
Permits shall be obtained for all work through the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), and shall be copied to DAS Facilities.
2.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
All sensors and thermostats shall be clearly labeled as to piece of equipment it controls or is referencing. (I.e.-TU-04-02). Ceiling grid directly below serviceable equipment such as Terminal Units, VAV’s, fans, etc. shall have printed labels to designate location of equipment. These labels shall match letter and number designation on prints and on sensors and thermostats.
All outdoor A/C equipment shall have equipment data information (i.e: equipment model & serial numbers, fan motor & compressor horsepower, etc) located inside equipment service panels to protect such information from the effects of weathering. The equipment datatag will be in addition to any equipment information already provided by the manufacturer, that are located on the outside of the equipment.
2.1 EMS NAMING AND IDENTIFICATION
AEMS control point naming and blueprint designation of equipment shall match manufacturer’s tag identification for that equipment. No generic naming, using card serial number and address, will be allowed. Note: Only enter points to be used into DAS data Base. Example; FD05 when that channel is not used. Exception is FF00system channel for card type identification.
Listed are some sample point names:
SF1_DAT (discharge air temp)
SF1_MAT (mixed air temp)
SF1_MAC (mixed air control PID loop)
SF1_DST (discharge static pressure) SF1_DSTC (discharge static control PID) SF1_SS (start/stop)
Sensors must be clearly identified with a suitable label and correctly located on plans and prints. Label shall reflect equipment nomenclature, such as: “VAV-38”, “TU-38”, or “FPB-38”.
“Smart names” shall not be used to describe equipment on plans. Naming convention in CAM system database shall follow those on plans and be approved by DAS.
All database point names attached to multiples of like equipment (such as VAV’s) shall be in the following format. Make note of the numbering system, in particular:
1. VAV1_RMT (if total # of VAV’s less than 10).
2. VAV01_RMT (if total # of VAV’s in double digits).
3. VAV001_RMT (if total # of VAV’s greater than 100).
Controller serial/unit numbers shall not be part of point names.
The controller serial number shall be used to address each database point attached to such
controller, not custom ID numbers.
3.0 CUSTOM PROGRAMS
Shall reside in the head end controller when not possible to reside in unitary controllers.
Alarms and Trends shall be created by DAS, unless specified by the building owner. In SPL, shall
use attributes registers and points and refrain from using variables.
3.1 CONTROL DRAWINGS
All system communications wiring routes shall be specified in detail, in the control “as built” drawings. Note: these to be accurate;
3.2 CONTROL SYSTEMS
All controls shall be direct digital control (DDC), no pneumatics, except for specialized equipment only, and DAS approved. The building control systems are to be Cylon Automatrix (CAM). All sensors, transducers and other devices shall be directly compatible with the (CAM) systems. No interfaces (such as BacNet, Lonworks, and ModBus) shall be used between the equipment and CAM control systems. Must use thermal type and avoid power sensors whenever possible.
“Application specific” controllers shall not be used, with the exception of variable air volume (VAV) controllers, unless approved by DAS. Use of “universal” type controllers is preferred, such as CAM Solo/DX, SBC_GPC, SBCVAV, IOX type expansion modules & controllers can be used, after DAS approval.
User controlled zone overrides, which enable the systems, shall not be installed, with the exception of conference room temperature set point control, and/or if a conference room has its own dedicated air delivery system, a user override can then be used to enable its complete system to operate.
For Equipment Status; Use “fixed set point “CT’s auction A. 5 amp trip point”
NO Bacnet, Lonworks, Modbus MSTP or IP on projects.
CT’s shall be fixed set point type. (NO smart CT’s or field adjustable CT’s)
Sensors shall not be powered, excepting pressure sensors. A: Temperature 10KOHM precon type 3 B: Pressure transducers, should be 2-10V Else 2 wire 4-20ma
Isolation valves/dampers shall be 24V digital control, spring return with fail position select.
Air mixing dampers shall be 2-10VDC control, 24VAC powered with fail select either spring return or MFT programmable.
Resets to control loops shall be done off of outside air temperature or room temperature or return air temperature. (Never highest valve position)
CAM front end Nexus, Enterprise. Voltage analog signals from sensors and to actuators.
Analog (voltage) HW and CW actuators on air handlers and VAV units.
Return fan modulation and building static pressure sensor for building pressure control.
Temperature sensor shall be 10K type 3. Voltage actuators and sensors (where powered sensors are needed)
Local pressure sensors to govern pump control. Stand-alone control for fire/life/safety systems. HOA shall be installed for any critical building equipment.
3.3 CONTROL OPERATION
Packaged boilers and chillers shall run on their own individual controls, via start/stop command for CAM controller. CAM shall control all pumps, and valves (unless approved by DAS). All other monitoring and control points shall be wired, directly from the chiller or boiler, to the CAM controllers. Cooling tower functions shall be controlled directly through the CAM system. Fan systems shall be controlled directly through the CAM system. This shall include supply and return fan start/stops, water valves, dampers, variable frequency drives, pumps, etc. Packaged rooftop units shall be controlled by the CAM system. If approved by DAS, smaller packaged systems may be controlled by their own controls. All fire/smoke dampers shall report status (open/closed) to the CAM system.
3.4 EMS SENSORS
There shall be a minimum of one space temperature sensor per zone of occupied space.
3.5 HVAC CONTROLS ELECTRICAL STANDARD • All AC wiring using two conductor cable with w/bk conductors shall use Black as the “Hot” ungrounded Conductor and White as the “Neutral” Grounded Conductor. • All DC Wiring using two conductor cable with w/bk conductors shall also use Black as the positive and White as the Negative this includes all I/O and RS-485 Communications. • All existing cable with Red and Black Conductors will use Red as the Positive or Hot and Black as the Negative conductor. • Transformers / All Primary side Hot conductors shall be Fused appropriately for their size. This could be 1 Fuse for several Transformers or individually fused. • Transformers / All Secondary side Hot conductors shall be Fused Appropriately for their size (VA Rating) • Metal or Plastic Separators shall separate High Voltage from Low Voltage inside cabinets. • All new Cabinets with 120vac installed shall have a surge protection device with damage indicator installed on High Voltage side downstream of Fuse protection. E.g. (Ditek DTK-HW) or equivalent. • Cable Jacket Colors: • All low voltage Power Supply Cables shall have Blue Jacket or at minimum Labeled at each end. Example: (from) 24VAC from Panel 4S in S Telcom Rm and (to) 24vac to VAV 4_19 • All RS-485 Communications cable shall have a yellow Jacket and also the ends be labeled (to) and (from) • All other I/O cables shall have a White Jacket and be labeled at each end (to) & (from) if cable leaves panel. • Panel Labeling: All New Installed panels shall have a Panel Label Pertinent to its Location or use. Example: 4S_SF2 meaning Fourth Floor South and Serving SF2. What it serves doesn’t have to be in the Label as the panel may serve multiple pieces of equipment. • Splices: All splices shall be done in a terminal block and if needed to be inside the raceway of the cabinet it shall be of the soldered or mechanically crimped If practical a new cable should be installed to eliminate the splice. • Use of Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV’s) or Quencharc’s. • All Relays or Inductive Loads that cycle shall have a MOV installed at the load connection of device to protect relay or Triac binary outputs from inductive voltage spikes. • Cable Type: All cables should be 18 Gauge Plenum Rated stranded copper at minimum. Shielded or unshielded and of the Low capacitance type for RS-485 communications. • Cable Support: All Cables shall be supported as per NEC and not bundled in with existing CAT5/6 Network Wiring or any type of high voltage. Extra care should be given to keeping RS-485 Network wiring away from High Voltage sources or noisy devices such as lighting Ballasts. • Ethernet Cable. All Ethernet Cable used for HVAC / DDC Controls shall be cat5 or cat6 and have an Yellow Jacket and be labeled at each end. (To and From).
4.0 CLEARANCE AND ACCESS
All control panels, disconnects and valves, installed above a ceiling, shall be located no more than 18” in height above the ceiling grid.
A minimum of 18” of clearance, from control panel front, to nearest obstruction is required. All control valves, isolation and flow control valves shall have a minimum clearance of 18” from the device to nearest obstruction.
Maximum installed height of all terminal units, VAV’s, fan powered boxes, etc. shall be no more than 18” from the top of suspended ceiling grid to bottom edge of the box.
No lighting fixtures, ceiling diffusers, fire sprinklers, conduit, or seismic bracing, shall impede access to terminal unit control and service panels, water control and isolation valves.
Where terminal units, VAV’s, etc. are located above a “hard ceiling” suitable access shall be provided and a platform or walkway installed to safely service the equipment.
There shall be a minimum of 36” of clearance for all service access panels on HVAC air handling/air conditioning equipment, or hatches. Install hatches for complete access.
Ceiling suspended equipment shall not be installed where building structure or permanently mounted equipment in the space below will impede access to control panels, disconnects and other serviceable items on the equipment. An exception is made where overhead access and working platforms/walkways to the equipment are provided.
Supports and seismic restraints shall be installed in such a manner as to not impede access to service panels. Work platforms shall be provided for servicing built up rooftop air handlers and cooling tower components, when area to be serviced is higher than 4 feet.
In mechanical spaces, all fans, pumps and serviceable equipment shall be located for easiest access, i.e.- not near ceiling.
5.0 HVAC SYSTEMS
Contractors shall provide HVAC equipment submittals for review by DAS O&M management prior to contract execution.
All design literature shall be 10 point design sheets.
All new chillers to be installed shall be oil free magnetic bearing centrifugal basis.
Where practical, main building HVAC systems shall incorporate hydronic closed loop heating and chilled water cooling systems into the design. The use of cooling towers shall be the preferred method of heat rejection for the chillers.
All mechanical, electrical and elevator equipment rooms shall be exhausted to exterior of building.
All data and telecom rooms shall have at a minimum, some type of mechanical cooling. Outside air should also be utilized in the winter months as a cost saving vehicle.
All new RTU’s to be installed shall have a 20:1 gas turn down.
All new boilers to be installed shall be of a condensing type.
Freeze protection shall be installed on any unit with OSA that contains water coils.
Heat recovery shall be installed for any single pass air system.
Installation of OAD, MAD and RAD dampers on SF, RF air handlers.
All split system condensing units shall be secured to wooden, pressure treated sleepers in such a manner as to restrict movement of equipment due to vibration etc…
All new HVAC equipment installed must have a hose bib within proximity of the HVAC equipment. If there is no hose bib present one shall be installed.
All condensate pans shall be made of a minimum, 18 gauge, and made of stainless steel. Galvanized steel shall not be used. Duct pressure safeties shall be installed for and new system.
All air conditioning & refrigeration systems shall have both high and low pressure controls in the safety circuit, high pressure control being of the manual reset type.
When Trane or any other proprietary brand units are specified a conventional wiring interface module shall be included. VFD’s shall be used on all air handlers and hydronic pumps over 2 hp.
6.0 DUCTWORK
No duct board shall be used. Flexible duct shall not be longer than seven feet.
6.1 PIPING
All copper pipe shall be type L, K, or ACR At no point shall any groove lock fittings to be covered concealed or placed in an area not easily assessable to maintenance staff.
Primary/secondary loop system shall be installed when multiple boilers/chillers are tied together.
Heating hot water circulating pumps shall be installed on the return side of the boiler.
All hydronic closed loops shall have manual or automatic air bleeds installed at the high points of the system.
All air bleeds located within buildings including mechanical rooms shall be piped to a drain.
All pressure relief valves from water heaters, chilled water, heating water, process loops shall be piped to a drain.
All boiler/chiller systems within mechanical rooms shall have piping fitted by threaded and or welded means.
Discharge piping from a condensate pump shall be copper pipe/tubing.
The use of die-electric unions are prohibited for transitions use a brass fitting or brass valve.
All building isolation valves shall be unobstructed and easily accessed for service.
All cooling tower drains to be piped to sanitary drains.
All refrigerant lines must be properly supported. The use of a vibration isolating bushing is required so that no copper tubing may contact supports, clamping devices or the structure itself. Armaflex or other pipe insulating material is not acceptable for this purpose.
6.2 VALVES
All chilled water and heating water systems shall have isolation valves located in a building at all supply and return mains where they branch out to the individual floor levels. The valves must be easily accessible and clearly marked at location, on plans and prints.
Control valves (mixing/diverting) shall be 3 way, 2-10VDC control, 24VAC powered with fail position select or MFT programmable option. All serviceable components of equipment IE: pumps, Y strainers, heat exchangers, gauges and control devices shall have isolation valves. Butterfly valves shall be ASME class lug style rated for bi-directional dead end service.
All Valves are to be full port 600 WOG class Triple Duty valve shall not be used as a shut off valve for mechanical equipment from a chilled water, condenser water or heating water system. All mechanical equipment, connected to a closed loop chilled water or heating water system, shall have isolation valves on the supply water going into and the return water going out of the equipment.
END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 15100 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL WORK INCLUDED Furnish piping, pipe fittings, and incidental related items as required for complete piping systems.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE The provisions of Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, apply to Work specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: Piping material and installation to meet requirements of the local plumbing, fire and building codes and serving utility requirements. Provide chlorination of domestic cold and hot water piping in accordance with County and State health requirements. Pipe Cleaning: Should any pipe be plugged or should foaming of water systems occur, disconnect piping, re-clean, and reconnect without additional expense to DAS. Correct any damage to the building or systems resulting from failure to properly clean the system without additional expense to DAS.
SUBMITTALS Submit the Following in Accordance with Section 15050: Product data on mechanical couplings and related components, double wall fuel oil pipe and fittings, and polypropylene waste and vent pipe. Test Reports and Certificates: Submit certificates of inspections and pipe tests to DAS. Submit certified welders’ certificates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS CAST IRON SOIL PIPE, SERVICE WEIGHT (NO-HUB) General: A code approved hub-less system conforming to Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301.
Pipe and Fittings: Service weight hubless cast iron conforming to ASTM A 74, Tyler, A.B.&I., or Griffen Glamorgan “True Spun.”
Gaskets: Compression type conforming to ASTM C 564. Couplings - Above Grade: Band type coupling in conformance with Cast Iron Soil Pipe institute (CISPI) 310- 90, consisting of stainless steel clamp and corrugated shield assemblies with a neoprene sealing sleeve. ASNI A21.6, ANSI A 21.10 Fittings. Couplings - Buried: Husky 24 gauge 304 stainless steel hub-less type clamp and orange corrugated shield assemblies with neoprene sealing gaskets (ASTM-C-564) or Clamp-All (125-inch pound torque), 24 gauge 304 stainless steel hub-less type clamp, and shield assemblies with neoprene sealing gaskets (ASTM-C- 564). Service: Sanitary, storm, and overflow drain. Venting piping 2 inches and above.
DUCTILE IRON WATER PIPE Pipe: Ductile iron pipe conforming to ANSI A21.51. Fittings: Below grade, Class 150 “Boltite” mechanical joint type complete with gaskets, bolts, and nuts or “Tylon” for joints employing a single gasket for the joint seal with bell-and-spigot pipe. Above grade, mechanical couplings and fittings as specified herein. Provide interior pipe coating per ANSI Regulation listed. Service: Below grade, incoming domestic water main, 4 inches and over.
LIGHT WALL BLACK STEEL PIPE General: All pipes other than Standard Schedule 10 or 40 shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection use. Fittings and joints must be UL listed with pipe chosen for use. Listing restrictions and installation procedures per NFPA 13 and state and local authorities must be followed for fire protection use. Pipe must be hot-dipped galvanized on FM jobs and dry pipe sprinkler systems and where required by DAS. Pipe: ASTM A135 or A53 For Fire Protection: Schedule 10 in sizes up to 5 inches. 0.134-inch wall thickness for 6-inch. 0.188 inch wall thickness for 8-inch and 10-inch. Fittings: Roll grooved ends with mechanical couplings as specified. Service: Fire protection system only for sizes listed, as approved by NFPA 13.
BLACK STEEL PIPE, SCHEDULE 40
General: Fittings and joints must be UL listed for use with pipe chosen for use. Listing restrictions and installation procedures per NFPA 13 and state and local authorities must be followed. Pipe must be hot- dipped galvanized on FM jobs with dry pipe systems and where required by DAS. Pipe: Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A 135 or A53. Fittings: 150 lb. screwed malleable iron on 2 inches and below, Schedule 40 welding fittings conforming to ASTM A 234 for 2-1/2 inches and above or mechanical couplings on select piping as herein specified. Fittings below grade shall be welding fittings. All elbows on pumped systems shall be long radius type. Short radius elbows not acceptable for use except as approved on a case by case basis. Service: Chilled and heating water piping up to and including 6 inches Fire protection system. Except fire protection fittings shall be 175 lb. cast iron. Natural gas piping and vent lines. Low pressure steam. Safety and relief valve discharge. Chemical treatment Miscellaneous drains and overflows.
BLACK STEEL PIPE, SCHEDULE 80 Pipe: Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM A135 or A53 Fittings: Extra heavy Class 300 screwed cast iron on 2-inch and below, extra strong welding fittings conforming to ASTM A234 for 2-1/2 inch and above. Service: Pumped and gravity condensate return.
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE Pipe: Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A135 or A 53. Fittings: 150 lb. screwed galvanized malleable iron on 2-inch and below. Victaulic, Gruvlok, Gustin-Bacon, or Mechanical Line full flow galvanized, grooved end on 2-1/2 and above. Provide grooved type gasketed couplings and fittings for pipe 2-1/2 and above. Service: Miscellaneous indirect waste piping. At Contractor’s option, waste and vent piping 1-1/2 inches and under, above grade.
COPPER PIPE Pipe: Hard drawn copper tubing, Class L or K, ASTM B 88.
Fittings: Wrought copper, 150 psi, solder joint type, Chase, Revere, Mueller or approved equal. At Contractor’s option, a system using mechanically extracted collars in main with branch line inserted to not obstruct flow may be used on domestic water piping above ground, similar to T-drill. Service: Domestic hot and cold water piping below ground (Type K, hard drawn) on piping 3 inches and smaller. Domestic hot and cold water piping above ground (Type L, hard drawn) on piping 4 inches and smaller. Trap priming lines (Type L, annealed). Refrigerate piping (Type L, hard drawn, ACR cleaned). Chilled and heating water piping (Type L, hard drawn) up to and including 4 inches.
FLANGED JOINTS Flanges shall be cast iron or steel for screwed piping and forged steel welding neck for welded line sizes. Pressure rating and drilling shall match the apparatus, valve, or fitting to which they are attached. Flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1; 150 lb. for system pressures to 150 psig; 300 lb. for system pressures 150 psig to 400 psig. Gaskets shall be 1/16-inch think, Cranite or equal, ring type, coated with graphite and oil to facilitate making a tight joint. Make joint using American Standard hexagon head bolts, lock washers, and nuts (per ASTM A307 GR.B) for service pressures to 150 psig; alloy steel stud bolts, lock washer, and American Standard hexagon head nuts (per ASTM A307 GR.B) for service pressures 150 psig to 400 psig. Use length of bolt required for full nut engagement. Provide electro-cad plated bolts and nuts on cold and chilled water lines.
UNIONS 150 psi malleable iron, brass to iron seat, ground joint, black or galvanized to match pipe. 200 psi WOG bronze, ground joint, solder type for copper tubing. Dielectric fittings shall be nationally listed, have a dielectric thermoplastic interior lining, and meet requirements of ASTM F-492. Fittings shall be suitable for the pressure and temperature to be encountered.
MECHANICAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS Acceptable Manufacturers: Victaulic. Gruvlok. Other Manufacturers: Under provisions of Section 01600. Couplings and Fittings: Couplings housing to be zero flex rigid type coupling with angled bolt pad design. Similar to Victaulic Type 07. Flexible couplings to be used only when expansion contractions, deflections or noise and vibration is to be dampened. Flexible Coupling to be similar to Victaulic Type 77. All elbows on pumped systems shall
be long radius type. Short radius elbows not acceptable for use except as approved on a case by case basis. Coupling gasket similar to Victaulic’s Grade E molded synthetic rubber per ASTM D-73.5, Grade No. R615BZ. Flushseal gasket configuration must be used on all heating nuts per ASTM A-183. Service: Fire protection systems. Chilled water. Heating water below 230° F.
SOLDER Copper Piping and Joints: Use Westinghouse Phos-Copper or Dyna-Flow by J.W. Harris Co., Inc. Valves, Cast Fittings or Bronze Fittings: Harris Stay-Silv-15 or Handy & Harmon Sil-Fos. Water Piping: All-State 430 with Duzall Flux, Engelhard Silvabrite with Engelhard General Purpose Flux or J.W. Harris Co. Stay-Safe 50 with Stay-Clean Flux. On 3-inch and smaller, on larger pipe use Type “A” solder.
UTILITY MARKERS Provide plastic tape utility markers over all buried piping. Provide identification on tape. Material to be Brady Identoline plastic tape, 6-inch, Seton, or as approved.
PIPE WRAPPING For all below ground steel piping and fittings, provide complete covering of Scotchrap No. 51, 20 mil thickness, protective tape applied over Scotchrap pipe primer applied at 1 gal/800 SF of pipe surface. At Contractor’s option as approved, pipe may be furnished with factory applied jacket of “X-tru-coat” with Scotchrap, as previously specified for field joints.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR Expansion Joint/Seismic Connector for Gas Service: AGA certified, T304 stainless steel hose and braid, Schedule 40 radius elbows and 180° bend, weld end Schedule 40 fittings. Metraflex Metaloop only.
PART 3 EXECUTION PREPARATION Measurement. Lines and Levels: Check dimension at the building site and establish lines and levels for work specified in this Section.
Establish all inverts, slopes, and manhole elevations by instrument, working from an established datum point. Provide elevation markers for use in determining slopes and elevations in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Use established grid and area lines for locating trenches in relations to building and boundaries. Locate valves as shown on drawings and as required to individually isolate all equipment, to individually isolate building systems by section and/or room, and to maintain proper flow and functions of systems.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL General: Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of mechanical work in accord with Division 2. Repair pipelines or other work damaged during excavation and backfilling. Excavation: Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width, removing rocks, roots, and stumps. Include additional excavation to facilitate utility crossovers, additional offsets, etc. Excavation material is unclassified. Width of trench shall be adequate for proper installation of piping. The trench shall be widened, if not wide enough for a proper installation. Bedding: All cast iron, steel, and copper piping shall be full bedded on sand. Place a minimum 4-inch deep layer on the leveled trench bottom, for this purpose. Remove the sand to the necessary depth for piping bells and couplings to maintain contact of the pipe on the sand for its entire length. Lay all other piping on a smooth level trench bottom so that contact is made for its entire length. Backfill: Place in layers not exceeding 8 inches deep, and compact to 95% of standard proctor maximum density at optimum moisture content. Earth backfill shall be free of rocks over 2 inches in diameter and foreign matter. Disposal of excess material as directed. Interior: All backfill under interior slabs shall be bank sand or pea gravel. Exterior: Excavated material may be used outside of buildings at the Contractor’s option. The first 4 inches shall be sand, and final 12-inch layer course shall be soil in any event.
PIPING INSTALLATION Install unions in all non-flanged piping connections to apparatus and adjacent to all screwed control valves, traps, and appurtenances requiring removal for servicing so located that piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system.
Mechanical Couplings: On systems using galvanized pipe and fittings, fittings shall be galvanized at factory. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with approved lubricant. Pipe grooving in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications contained in latest published literature. Install all piping as to vent and drain. Support all piping independently at apparatus so that its weight shall not be carried by the equipment. Run piping clear of tube cleaning or removal/replacement access area on coils, heat exchangers, chillers, etc.
Utility Marking: Installed over the entire length of the underground piping utilities. Install plastic tape along both sides and the center line of the trenches at the elevation of approximately 12 inches above the top of utility. Dielectric Fittings: Provide dielectric couplings, unions, or flanges between dissimilar metals. In addition, provide dielectric couplings as required to isolate catholically protected piping and equipment. No-Hub Couplings: Install per manufacturer’s instructions.
Plumbing Fixtures
During any upgrade/remodel or new build the fowling standards must be meet.
1) All faucets shall be hardwired and be of hands free operation. 2) All faucets shall be constructed to ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 standards. 3) All Urinals, toilets shall be fitted and hardwired for sensor controlled auto flush. FIG 1-A & 2-A 4) The use of battery operated auto flush sensors and hands free faucets are prohibited. 5) All restroom fixtures shall be low water flow if possible. 6) Before installation of any low water flow fixture there must be a study to insure that the existing plumbing waste system will accommodate low water flow fixtures.
FIG 1-A
FIG 2-A
Water Heaters
1) All water heaters 100 gallons in capacity and operating with an input of 200.000BTU shall be type HLW and be ASME constructed. 2) All water heaters regardless of size shall have the T&P valve piped to a drain.
PIPING JOINTS Pipe and fittings shall be joined using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer in conformance with standard practice and applicable codes. Cleaning, cutting, reaming, grooving, etc., shall be done with proper tools and equipment. Hacksaw pipe cutting prohibited. Peening of welds to stop leaks, not permitted. Copper Piping: Soldered Joints: Pipe cut evenly with cutter, ream to full inside diameter, end of pipe and inside of fitting thoroughly cleaned and polished. Joint shall be uniformly heated, and capillary space completely filled with solder, leaving full bead around entire circumference. Brazed Joints: All joints using mechanically extracted collars shall be brazed in accordance with the copper development association copper tube handbook, using B-cup series filler metal. Soft solder joints will not be accepted. No couplings installed in floor or wall sleeves. Steel Piping: Screwed Joints: Pipes cut evenly with pipe cutter reamed to full inside diameter with all burrs and cuttings removed. Joints made up with suitable lubricant or Teflon tape applied to male threads only, leaving two threads bare. Joints tightened so that not more than two threads are left showing. Junctions between galvanized steel waste pipe and bell of cast iron pipe shall be made with tapped spigot or half coupling on steel pipe to form spigot end and caulked. Flanged Joints: Pressure rating of flanges shall match valve or fitting joined. Joint gaskets shall be coated with graphite and oil. Welded Joints:
Preparation for Welding: Bevel piping on both ends before welding: Use following weld spacing on all butt welds: Nominal Pipe Wall Thickness Spacing Bevel 1/4” or less 1/8” 37-1/2 Over1/4”, less than 3/4” 3/16” 27-1/2 Before welding, remove all corrosion products and foreign material from surfaces Welded Joints: Joints shall be made by the “arc-welding” process using certified welders. Port openings of fittings must match the inside diameter of the pipe to which they are welded. Use full radius welding elbows for all turns, use welding tees for all tees. Reducing fittings must be used for size reduction. “Weldolets”: may be used for branches up through one-half the pipe size of the main to which they are attached. Nipples are not allowed. Welding Operations: After deposition, clean each layer of weld metal to remove slag and scale by wire brushing or grinding. Chip where necessary to prepare for proper deposition of next layer. Weld reinforcement no less than 1/16-inch not more than 1/8-inch above normal surface of jointed sections. Reinforcement crowned at center and taper on each side to surfaces being joined. Exposed surface of weld shall present professional appearance and be free of depressions below surface of jointed members. No welding shall be done when temperature of base metal is lower than 0 degrees F. Material to be welded during freezing temperatures shall be made warm and dry before welding is started. Metal shall be “warm to the hand” or approximately 60 degrees F.
Screwed Joints: Use Teflon tape or Teflon liquids dope applied to male threads, only. Ductile Iron Pipe: Joints made using standard ductile iron mechanical joint retainer glands, Underwriters’ Laboratories listed for 250 psi pressure, or standard mechanical joints with the rods and flanges.
INSTALLATION, PIPE WRAP Apply per manufacturer’s written instruction. Apply wrapping to fittings in field, after installation.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING General: Clean interior of all piping before installation. Flush sediment out of all piping systems. Domestic Water Chlorination:
Upon completion of all tests and necessary replacements, all domestic water piping shall be disinfected. Chlorination shall be accomplished by personnel in employ of firm licensed to do this type of work. As a minimum potable water systems shall be disinfected prior to use as outlined within the Uniform Plumbing Code Section 609.9, or as prescribed by the Health Authority, whichever requirements are more stringent. Bacteriological samples shall be submitted to a certified laboratory who shall certify that the water is suitable for drinking. The certificate stating purity of water shall be delivered to the Owner’s Authorized Representative.
INSTALLATION - NATURAL GAS PIPING Install piping where shown on Drawings. Black Steel Pipe: Welded joints shall be made by the “arc-welding” process by certified welders as outlined above. On piping below grade install protective pipe wrap after testing and prior to backfilling in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Overlap one-half spiral lap for double thickness. Piping installed under building floor slabs in vented sleeve per code. END OF SECTION 15100 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARDS
Modifications to DAS owned or operated buildings shall support building services, structures, and systems; conform to codes and be safe for occupants. They shall be cost effective in design, construction, installation, maintenance, and operation. For those reasons, DAS maintains and requires conformance to Technical Standards that exceed state and local minimum codes. The use of building and finish materials which match existing materials and are of comparable quality is required.
1.0 PERMITS
Permits shall be obtained for all work through the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), and shall be copied to DAS Facilities.
1.1 CODES All electrical equipment and installations shall be listed and comply with current code year NEC/NFPA/Oregon ORS law.
All limited energy equipment and installations shall be listed and comply with current code year NEC/NFPA/Oregon ORS law. Including current ANSI standards such as TIA/EIA 568 B, 569, 606A and 607.
2.0 DEVICES All switches and receptacles shall be at least 20-amp spec grade, with metal yokes.
All device cover plates shall be stainless steel. 3.0 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS All branch circuits shall be copper. Type AC or MC (Steel) cable may only be used by special approval from DAS. Aluminum AC or MC cable is prohibited. All service and branch feeders shall be stranded copper main service feeders may be aluminum by special permission, but if used, they shall have installed non-reversible compression adapters on both ends of each conductor.
All splices in #8 and larger shall be non-reversible crimp type. Motors are exempt.
All connections for motors above one horsepower shall be terminated by means of an insulated multi cable connector.
All feeders shall be tested with a Megohm-meter and documented.
4.0 PANEL BOARDS AND SWITCHBOARDS
All panels and panel boards shall be 42 circuit to allow for expansion and filled with breakers (except by approval from DAS for specific needs).
All circuit breakers are to be of bolt-in type and SWD rated.
Panel boards shall be at least 6 inches deep with solid top and bottom. Pre-punched knockouts are not approved for use.
Panel boards and switchboards shall use copper busses.
Panel board covers shall be “door within a door” type using a continuous hinge.
All switchgear disconnects shall be heavy-duty rated.
All conduit runs from a panel shall be at least 3/4-inch diameter.
A minimum of (2) 1 ½ inch diameter empty conduits shall be installed into an enclosure with no KO’s and not smaller than 12”x12”x6” in an accessible location above ceiling height, and under floor (where raised floor systems are used), from electrical panels that are not surface mounted.
Keep switchgear, panels, and equipment clean during construction.
5.0 TRANSFORMERS
Transformers shall have copper windings and conform to NEMA TP-1 efficiency standards.
6.0 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS Aluminum flexible conduit is prohibited. All flexible conduit LFMC (Steel) used in mechanical rooms shall be liquid-tight flex. FMC (Steel) flex may be used in all other locations requiring flexible conduit.
All flexible conduit LFMC (Steel) used in outdoor locations shall be UV rated.
Install 120VAC circuit above all restroom doorways for ADA door operators. NOTE: This circuit does not need to be a dedicated circuit. All wiring in mechanical or electric rooms shall be raceway enclosed.
Security, data, or fire alarm cables that are exposed, (below ceilings) shall be raceway enclosed, except on backboards provided for the purpose.
All conduit runs from a panel shall be at least 3/4-inch diameter.
All conduits shall be GRC, IMC, EMT, FMC-(Steel), LFMC-(Steel), or PVC.
All 4” square and 4 11/16 boxes shall be at least 2 1/8 inches deep.
All conduit fittings, locknuts, conduits and wire bodies shall be steel. Die cast fittings and lock rings are prohibited.
All conduit runs greater than 100 feet shall have at least one pull point per 100 feet of conduit.
All conduit and cables are to be run parallel and perpendicular to structure, with no diagonal runs.
8.0 LUMINAIRES
Emergency exit and egress lighting shall be like to existing and connected to emergency system if available.
All emergency lights shall be dotted or identified as such when installed.
Fluorescent luminaires shall have integral ballasts. No remote ballasts are permitted.
Fluorescent fixtures using standard straight lamps shall be equipped with cam lock style sockets, (VS-100500, VS-100600 series, ALP brand LH 202 or 203 series) or approved.
Splicing devices within H.I.D. fixtures shall be 105 degree Centigrade rated, or higher.
9.0 SUPPORTS
Fasteners or anchors shall only be used if such application is recommended by manufacturer.
Dedicated messenger conduits or an approved support (such as Caddy supports) shall independently support all security, data, and fire alarm wiring.
Where possible, data, security and telephone wiring shall be installed in cable tray to allow for future expansion.
10.0 IDENTIFICATION
All panel boards, MCC, MDP, transformers and disconnect switches shall be labeled by engraved phenolic plastic nameplates.
All switch, receptacles and exposed J-boxes shall be labeled with panel and circuit number. All labeling shall be done by the use of a P-Touch or equivalent labeling method of ½” clear tape with black lettering.
All cables and branch circuit wiring shall be marked with an approved permanent means of identification (Ex: as Brady or Panduit labeling machine). Labels shall be at each end and each junction point to indicate panel and circuit number. J-box covers that are not exposed are to be labeled with the panel and circuit number by a black felt marker.
11.0 WIRE COLOR CODING Color coding shall be maintained in all applications including feeders, branch circuits and switch legs. Voltage color code are as follows:
1. Single phase 120/208-240V – Black-A, Red-B Neutral White.
2. Three phase 120/208V Y- Black-A, Red-B, Blue-C Neutral White.
3. Three phase 120/240V Delta – Black-A, Orange-C, Blue-C Neutral White
4. Three phase 277/480V – Brown-A, Orange-B, Yellow-C, Neutral Grey
5. Neutrals are to be identified according to phase or circuit number.
6. Switch legs shall be pink.
7. Travelers for three and four way switches shall be purple. 11.1 LIMITED ENERGY CABLING
Voice shall be White.
Computer Data from Patch Panel to Field Device shall be Blue.
Computer Data from Router or Switch to Patch Panel shall be Pink.
Building Automation System (HVAC) LAN shall be Yellow.
Building Automation System Riser shall be Purple.
Building Automation Lighting shall be Orange.
Low Voltage Cables for Electronic Security Access & CCTV systems (CCTV, card key and keypad access systems) shall be Green.
Fire Alarm cabling shall be red.
All cables, no matter what length, shall be labeled at both ends with a machine-produced label, indicating location of both termination points (floor, room, etc.).
All cabling installed in environmental air spaces shall be plenum rated per current NEC and NFPA.
When inner duct is used, it shall be plenum rated where used in environmental air spaces.
All unused cabling shall be removed and not abandoned in place.
All temporary wiring shall be tagged so as to indicate installation date and identify installer.
12.0 PENETRATIONS
All penetrations through fire rated walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, or smoke barriers shall be sealed with approved methods. Penetration sleeves shall be mechanically secured so as to maintain the integrity of the fire stopping materials and building finished surfaces. 13.0 EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS All new construction and building modernization projects shall include an (LEVEL 1 EPSS) system.
Minimum time rating of the EPSS shall comply to NFPA 110 4.4.4 (2) CLASS 2
NFPA 110 A.4.4.1 Typically, Level 1 systems are intended to automatically supply illumination or power, or both, to critical areas and equipment in the event of failure of the primary supply or in the event of danger to elements of a system intended to supply, distribute, and control power and illumination essential for safety to human life.
Essential electrical systems can provide power for the following essential functions:
1) Life safety illumination 2) Fire detection and alarm systems 3) Elevators 4) Fire pumps 5) Public safety communications systems 6) Industrial processes where current interruption would produce serious life safety or health hazards 7) Essential ventilation and smoke removal systems
END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 16725 SECURITY
PART 1 GENERAL PURPOSE The purpose of this Section is to define the unique standards and performance requirements of DAS.
RELATED SECTIONS Division 1 - General Requirements. Division 2 - Site Construction. Division 8 - Doors and Windows. Division 13 - Special Construction. Division 15 - Mechanical. Division 16 - Electrical.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Term Abbreviation Definition
Access Control ACS An electronic system where a valid credential, typically a proximity System card, is presented to a reader thereby allowing the electric unlocking of a door.
American National ANSI As applies to this Security Section, it means accepted cutouts and Standards Institute preparation of door frames and doors to allow the application of specific types of devices and locking hardware.
Approved by DAS A product or service substitution by a Contractor and/or Vendor shall require approval by DAS under all circumstances, and that “approval” is the final arbiter of the substitution request.
Construction CSI The organization that determines the outline and general content Specification of the Master Format specifications. More information may be Institute obtained at http://www.csinet.org/s_csi/index.asp
Daisy -chain The wiring practice where like or related devices are wired on the same circuit in an "in/out" method maintaining circuit polarity and continuity.
DAS Electrical DAS's Electrical Standard as published elsewhere in the overall Standards construction standard. The Electrical Standard is considered to be an integral part of the Security Section.
Term Abbreviation Definition
Department of DAS Oregon department that is the Owner of the building under Administrative consideration, or acts as DAS on behalf of other state agencies. Services
Digital Video DVMS A digitally recorded closed -circuit television system that records Management System activity based pre-selected parameters.
Elevator Access EAC An enclosure associated with an elevator or bank of elevators Control Cabinet whose sole function is to support elevator control and floor tracking.
Global Programming Programming functions which require the Lenel Access Control System server to process the commands and outputs.
Auto Operator AO Electrical or pneumatic door operator that operates a door automatically or with manual input. (formerly known as a “Handicap Operator”)
Home -run The wiring practice where wiring is typically routed from its origination to final connection point with no intervening splices, terminations, or connections. Under this Standard remotely mounted Access Control System modules will be "home-run", and daisy-chaining will not be used.
Images Per Second IPS A rate of recording for an individual video input. The greater the IPS, the more information that can be delineated during review.
Intelligent System ISC Controller
Integrated Security ISS Systems
Intrusion Detection IDS An electronic system that can detect and report intrusion via System various means such as door contacts, glass break sensors, and various types of motion sensors.
Limited Energy "A" LEA Installation, alteration, maintenance, replacement or repair of electrical wiring and electrical products that do not exceed 100 volt-amperes in Class 2 and Class 3 installations.
Local Programming Programming functions which require only the Lenel ISC to process the commands and outputs.
Operations & O&M DAS Operations and Maintenance department Maintenance
Term Abbreviation Definition
Operation and O&MM Manuals submitted by the SCV in bound or software version that Maintenance details the operation and maintenance of a "system" and its Manuals various components and devices.
Owner’s Authorized Project Manager, Architect or Engineer who is authorized by Representative contract to act on behalf of DAS.
Security Consultant SC A professional consultant contracted by DAS to provide services for the design and specification of security systems including, but not limited to, access control, digital video management, and intrusion detection systems.
Security SCV A Contractor/vendor who specializes in providing shop drawings Contractor/Vendor and installation of security systems.
Hardware Consultant HC Consultant responsible for specifying all mechanical door hardware, door and frames and writing specifications for same
Steel Door Institute SDI The SDI Standards are utilized by architects and construction specification writers in commercial, industrial and institutional applications world-wide.
Security Equipment SEC An enclosure(s) centrally located in a building that house "head - Cabinet end" and door controller modules and TBMs for an Access Control System.
Security Intercom SIS A dedicated intercom system for the sole purpose of allowing System verbal communication for security related functions.
System Cx The process by which the final system installation and Commissioning programming is field verified and recorded.
Terminal Block TBM A group of wire terminals that are grouped together for like or Module associated functions.
Terminal Block TBC An enclosure associated with an Access Control System door that Cabinet houses the door's TBM and remotely mounted modules as applicable.
Uninterruptible UPS Typically a 120VAC input with 120VAC output that has integrals Power Supply batteries that prevent the dropping of the 120VAC output during times of limited or no 120VAC input.
Should other terms and definitions from this Section conflict with other terms and definitions from other DAS Standards, the Security Consultant should immediately seek written clarification of the meanings. This clarification request shall be in writing and the associated response shall be in writing by DAS.
PROJECT TYPES New Construction/Major Remodel New construction shall involve the design and construction of a new facility and/or building that has not previously existed. Design and construction is typically, but not always, under the auspices of Owner's Authorized Representative. A major remodel shall typically consist of a building that will be “gutted” and detailed design and specifications for the remodel will be provided by Owner's Authorized Representative. System Renovation A system renovation is typically an existing facility which has previously had little or no Access Control System installed. Under this format, the Security Consultant will typically be contracted directly to DAS. System renovations are often “hardware centric” as the existing doors, frames and locking hardware must be modified and/or replaced to allow the new electrified hardware to be installed. System Enhancement or Upgrade A system enhancement or upgrade shall typically be a building(s) that have an obsolete Access Control System, and it is being upgraded to current DAS standards. The Security Consultant will typically be contracted directly to DAS. In most cases, this form of system enhancement or upgrade will required little or no modification of the existing field and/or door hardware. A system enhancement or upgrade might also include partial work in an existing building(s). An example of such work might be the replacement and upgrade of magnetic locks to meet current DAS standards.
EXPERIENCE The Security Consultant contracted directly by the Owner’s Authorized Representative or DAS must have the following documented experience: A minimum of five (5) years’ experience providing consulting services for physical/electronic security design. Experience with the project type as noted above. This does not need to have been a DAS project, but should be capable of being documented at the request of DAS. Specific experience with Lenel Access Control System is required when installing or integrating with DAS access control systems. Security Consultant shall be capable of documenting a minimum of three (3) Lenel projects with a minimum of 15 readers on each project. When a proposed project has Integrated Security Systems, a minimum of two (2) project references shall consist of similar ISS-type projects. Integrated Security Systems shall consist of Access Control System that has one or more of the following systems integrated via TCP/IP, RS-232, or relays: Digital Video Management System consisting of digital based required, cameras, wiring infrastructure, and associated hardware and software. Intrusion Detection System. Security Intercom System.
The Security Consultant shall be able to document experience in specifying and designing all other security equipment described in the project scope of work. DAS shall evaluate the experience to determine if it is adequate for the given project. Examples may include: Door hardware: Experience specifying various types of door hardware. Modification of existing doors, frames and hardware to meet project goals. Standard installation methods and operations of door hardware. Alarm systems: Experience specifying various types of alarm systems. Integration with other security systems. Standard installation methods and operation of alarm systems. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV): Experience specifying various types of CCTV systems. Modification of existing CCTV systems to meet project goals. Standard installation methods and operation of CCTV systems and related software.
Working Knowledge: Security Consultant shall be able to indicate a thorough working knowledge of the technology, theory, and practice of physical/electronic security systems and applications. If this working knowledge cannot be documented in the specific project references, it shall be provided in the required personnel resumes.
Context of Work: The Security Consultant should view all work provided on a specific project as an objective part of DAS’ overall design scheme and criteria. As an example, should the project under consideration require a unique door “function” which will require a specific door detail and conduit coordination drawing, those drawings should be prepared to fit into the “existing library” of details and conduit coordination drawings. The Security Consultant should be prepared to provide specifications, details, and drawings in the format indicated in Statement of Work.
RELATED DOCUMENTS The Security Consultant shall incorporate all applicable “Related Documents” in work prepared for DAS as outlined above. Related Codes and Standards shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Oregon Structural Specialty Code as currently adopted. Oregon Fire Code as currently adopted. Oregon Electrical Code as currently adopted. Oregon DAS Standards that may impact this work product including:
DAS Electrical Standards. Where conflicts arise between this Section, applicable codes, and other DAS Standards, applicable codes shall prevail. Such conflicts shall be brought to DAS’s attention in writing in a timely manner. DAS may, at its discretion, instruct the Security Consultant to re-prioritize other DAS Standards over this Security Section in order to meet the requirements of a specific project.
Key Terms and Definitions: “Approved by DAS” shall be meant to indicate that a product or service substitution by a Contractor and/or vendor shall require approval by DAS under all circumstances, and that “approval” is the final arbiter of the substitution request.
SCOPE OF WORK Referencing the Project Types above, what follows are the minimum standards. Specifications: Specifications shall be written in the standard 3-Part CSI Master Format. The Security Consultant shall modify the specification to comply with the requirements for the project under consideration. The specification should allow for foreseeable conditions on the given project. “Canned” or “boiler-plate” specifications are not deemed acceptable. Unless approved by DAS, the Security Systems specification shall reside in Section 13700. Depending on the complexity of the project, the Security Consultant may choose to sub-divide the various security sub-systems in a format similar to those shown for the 2004 Master Format. If separate Sections are used for sub-systems, the Security Consultant shall make clear and concise correlations for the interoperability of the sub-systems. CSI 2004 Master Format: Access Control: Section 28 10 00. Intrusion Detection: Section 28 16 00. Video Surveillance (CCTV): Section 28 23 00. The Security Consultant shall make clear and concise correlations for the interoperability of the sub-systems. The use of “attachments” as provided as samples in this Section shall be used to clarify the requirements of the specification. Power Supply Matrix The “party” deemed contractually responsible for the final system design shall prepare a “Power Supply” spreadsheet. The spreadsheet shall indicate the anticipated loads on each power supply and its respective individual terminals. Loading shall comply with the requirements of this Section. See Power Supplies under Acceptable Equipment.
The Security Consultant shall define the power supply requirements, however, the Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide final power supply calculations based upon final loading and complying this Section’s requirements. Cable Labeling Scheme The Security Consultant shall provide a unique “Cable Labeling Scheme” for each system to be provided on the project. The Security Consultant and Security Contractor/Vendor shall utilize the abbreviations found in Attachment “B” of this Section for all access control systems labeling. The Security Consultant should be prepared to provide a labeling scheme for meeting the format requirements indicated in Attachment “B” for Digital Video Management System (CCTV), Intrusion Detection System and SIS. Verify with DAS if formats have been created in the duration between the writing of this Section and the subsequent project. Security Door Matrix The Security Consultant shall provide a “Security Door Matrix” for all doors that are to be configured on the system. The purpose of the Security Door Matrix is to be the master coordinating document between the various design disciplines and trades involved in the installation. The Security Consultant shall provide significant input into the selection of the appropriate electrified door hardware and field devices at each door to be configured utilizing DAS standards. Cable/Wire Schedule The Security Consultant shall provide a “Cable/Wire Schedule” which shall call out all cable and wire required on the project. System Commissioning Forms: The Security Consultant shall prepare and provide “System Commissioning Forms” for each major sub- system (i.e. ACS, IDS, DVMS, etc.) and the major system components for each sub-system. The following table outlines those provided, and the modifications allowed.
TABLE 1 – CX FORMS
System Cx Sheet Status Modification
ACS/IDS Control Panels Standardized Modify w/DAS Approval
ACS/DVMS Power Supplies Standardized Modify w/DAS Approval
ACS Field Hardware Standardized Modify w/DAS Approval
ACS/IDS Alarm Points Standardized Modify w/DAS Approval
DVMS DVR Sample Only Modify for Unique Requirements of Project
DVMS Cameras Sample Only Modify for Unique Requirements of Project
DVMS DVR Training Sample Only Modify for Unique Requirements of Project
When additional Cx forms are required, the Security Consultant shall provide the necessary forms. Cx Forms shall be provided as a template to the Security Contractor/Vendor, who will complete and provide Cx forms as required by the specification. All matrices and Cx forms shall be created in MS Excel.
Drawings The Security Consultant should anticipate providing drawings of the following types when providing services on a DAS security project. Floor Plans: Floor plans shall be to the scale determined by the Owner’s Authorized Representative or DAS. Where no scale has been determined, the Security Consultant should provide no less than 1/8” = 1’ drawings. Where multiple sheets are required to depict a floor plan, match lines are required. For smaller projects, more than one floor plan may be associated with a single drawing so long as there is not any confusion or use of different scales.
Access Control System Doors: Access Control System doors shall be depicted on the drawings with a “pin point” and leader to a “tag”. (See the description of “Door/Device Tags” below for clarification.) Each Access Control System door shall have a unique “door identifier” symbol associated with it. The door identifier shall clearly indicate the secured versus the unsecured side of the door. Unique devices such as work stations, remote power supplies, and door devices not immediately adjacent to the respective door shall be indicated with the device symbol and an appropriate sheet note. Panel Elevation and Detail Drawings: The centralized components of the Access Control System are to be referred to “security equipment cabinet(s). The Security Consultant should furnish Security Equipment Cabinet “elevation” drawings indicating the required enclosures, power supplies, battery cabinets, gutters and conduits (including 120VAC) for the project. This should be a detail in the drawing set, and be at a minimum of ½” = 1’ (1:24). Each enclosure, control panel and power supply should have a “detail call-out” associated with it. The Security Consultant’s responsibility by providing this detail in the construction package is to ensure that the required equipment and components will have sufficient wall space including a 20% expansion allotment for the future addition of door readers and associated power supplies and other required equipment. Future enclosures, power supplies, battery cabinets, and gutter should be indicated by a lighter, dashed line with a “(F)”associated with each future component.
The Security Consultant shall provide Security Equipment Cabinet panel layout details scaled at no less than 6” = 1’ (1:2). The detail shall indicate all modules, terminal blocks, wire finger duct, and associated equipment required on each panel. The following table defines the spatial relationship between the various modules, terminal strips, and finger duct in an enclosure:
Table 2 – Finger Duct Distances
From To Min. Dist.
Module, Non -Terminal Side Module, Non -Terminal Side .5”
Module, Non -Terminal Side Module, Terminal Side 3.0”
Module, Terminal Side Module, Terminal Side 3.0”
Module, Non -Terminal Side Finger Duct .5”
Module, Terminal Side Finger Duct 2.0”
Module, Any Side Terminal Strip, Side 3.0”
Module, Any Side Terminal Strip, End 1.5”
Terminal Strip, Side Finger Duct 2.5”
Terminal Strip, End Finger Duct N/A
Unless contractually required, the Security Consultant will not typically be required to show point- to-point wiring diagrams in the various panel layouts. All finger ducts in the enclosure shall be affixed to the backplane only. It is not acceptable to affix the finger duct to the sides of the enclosure. The following is a list of potential panels and associated components that the Security Consultant should be prepared to provide in a construction document set: Control Panel w/associated I/O and Readers. Reader Panel. Elevator Control and Floor Tracking. ACS Power Supplies. DVMS back panel. DVMS Power Supplies. DS Panels/Power Supplies. Security Intercom System Panels/Power Supplies. The panel detail provided is not to scale, but is provided to give a general impression of the level of detail required.
Door Detail The Security Consultant shall provide a “door detail” for each unique door configuration on a project. The Security Consultant shall use the “library” of details that DAS has amassed and catalogued. The following are the essential requirements of these details: Unless requested otherwise by DAS, the door details shall be published using 8.5” x 11” format. The details and associated supporting documents shall be an attachment to the specification. New details shall match the existing format and shall be approved by DAS prior to publication. The detail shall include a plan view of the door and shall include the following: Bill of Material. Notes. Responsibilities. Generic point-to-point diagram for terminal blocks and connections. It will be the responsibility of the Security Contractor/Vendor to provide a detailed configuration for each individual door in their shop drawings. Functional matrix which clearly portrays the functional requirements of that particular door configuration, including all readers, alarm points, alarm descriptions etc. Descriptions shall be provided by DAS. It is critical that DAS has input into this process, so that their terminologies will match the programming and system documentation. A sub-matrix may be utilized to provide the extended door unlock times on a door-to-door basis. Readers shall default to a locked configuration when operating in an “off-line” mode. A door “transfer” configuration which clearly outlines the wire color coding scheme during the various transitions. Molex connectors will be used to make the connections for the various wire-to-wire connections. (See EQUIPMENT for further clarification.)
SCOPE OF WORK Conduit Coordination Detail: Each door detail will have a corresponding “Conduit Coordination Detail” for each door detail furnished with a project. This detail shall reflect the following: Elevation view of the door with all necessary boxes, conduits, and door preps. Bolt centerline (CL) for specified locking device. Critical distance measurements. Notes for clarification of intent. If a Conduit Coordination Detail meets the “exact” requirements for more than one door configuration, it shall be used for those doors.
SECURITY CONTRACTOR/VENDOR REQUIREMENTS In Part 1 of the Security System Specification (or in each sub-system specification), the Security Consultant shall create a prominent paragraph titled “Quality Assurance”. This paragraph shall, at a minimum, outline the requirements for the Security Contractor/Vendor.
The following are minimum requirements for the Security Contractor/Vendor: General Requirements: All personnel noted below shall regularly work from an office located within 75-miles of the project site. (For the purposes of this Section, the project site is considered to be the Salem metropolitan area. When projects are in other areas of the state, the Security Consultant should modify this distance to reflect the project conditions.)
NOTE SPECIFICALLY ; All personnel working on a project shall minimally pass the following background checks: The background check for all Security Contractor/Vendor personnel performing programming on the Lenel system shall include an FBI National Criminal History background check (fingerprinting required) to be performed by the State Police. DAS keycard shop shall receive an email confirmation sent by State Police ID Services stating the summary outcome of the background check. No detail shall be provided to DAS keycard shop other than Pass/No-Pass. For all personnel (including subs) working in a specific space or building the security background check shall be the minimum required to satisfy all tenants in the area. The Security Consultant shall confirm the background requirements for each project. Wiring Installation Contractor: When wiring is required to be installed for a project, the Security Contractor/Vendor shall have their own personnel or qualified Subcontractors provide the installation of the wiring. (Conduit and raceway, in some instances, may be provided by the Division 16 Contractor.) The installation crew shall be led by a foreperson, who at a minimum, holds an Oregon license as a Limited Energy “A” (LEA) journeyman. This foreperson shall directly supervise the installation of all wiring associated with the systems. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide a resume with the references for the foreperson outlined below. The resume shall reflect a minimum of three (3) projects of a similar nature and scope in the last three (3) years. All other wire installation crew members shall have the appropriate license required for the project. All 120VAC connections shall be made by an Oregon licensed electrician. When the door hardware is required to be installed under the control and management of the Security Contractor/Vendor, the following shall apply to the personnel involved: Installers shall be factory trained (certificate required) on the door hardware to be installed or shall provide verifiable references of prior installations of similar door hardware. Lead Installer of door hardware shall have a minimum of two (2) years of documented installation experience.
The Security Contractor/Vendor shall have the following personnel available for the installation: Project Manager: The Security Contractor/Vendor project manager is the person who will act as the primary interface between the Security Contractor/Vendor, DAS, and the associated Contractor team. The project manager shall have the following credentials to supervise a DAS project: Five (5) years’ experience in the installation, programming, and testing of systems similar to the ones being installed. Documented experience with at least five (5) projects similar in size and scope to the project under consideration.
Lead Technician (Foreman): The Security Contractor/Vendor lead technician shall have the following responsibilities and qualifications: Act as project foreman and primary onsite interface for Security Contractor/Vendor. A principal responsibility of this position is to keep a copy of the shop drawings in a continuous state of handwritten upgrade reflecting the actual installation of the system(s). These “record drawings” shall be made available to DAS and/or their consultant upon verbal request. Shall be actively involved on a daily basis in the project. Supervise all panel and device terminations. (Supervision shall mean the inspection of each unique configuration and a random sampling inspection of work of a repetitive nature, i.e. common door types.) Provide all programming required by specification. Assist DAS and Security Consultant with final system testing and/or commissioning (Cx). Oregon LEA journeyman license. A Lenel factory certification on the software and hardware which has been deemed “current” by the manufacturer in the six (6) months prior to the bid date Factory training (factory issued certificate required) on all other systems being installed is not required but is preferred. At a minimum three (3) years’ experience in the installation, programming, and testing of systems similar to the specified system(s) is required. Documented experience with at least three (3) projects similar in size and scope. Technicians: The Security Contractor/Vendor technician shall have the following responsibilities and qualifications (on small projects, the Lead Technician may be the Technician; therefore, the Lead Technician requirements shall prevail): Perform all panel and device terminations under the direct supervision of the Lead Technician. Direct supervision means at the immediate job site or able to be reached by phone immediately. Oregon LEA journeyman license. One (1) year experience in the installation and testing of systems similar to the specified system(s). An Oregon LEA apprentice may work on the project under the following guidelines: They have onsite supervision at all times. Onsite supervision means the LEA journeyman will be in the same building at all times to actively supervise the apprentice.
The Security Contractor/Vendor shall meet the following minimum requirements to participate in a DAS security project: The vendor shall identify at least three (3) vehicles used full time in the installation of access control and security products. The Security Contractor/Vendor must have a full time 24/7 service department. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall have at least (3) technicians licensed by State of Oregon Building Codes Division to install low voltage wiring on staff at all times. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall have at least (2) certified Lenel technicians on staff at all times. (The technicians shall be certified on the software and hardware which has been deemed “current” by the manufacturer in the six (6) months prior to the bid date.
The Security Contractor/Vendor should list any other resources available on staff. This could include CAD drafter, MCSE etc. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall endeavor at all times to protect keys and keycards from unauthorized use. This includes reporting lost or stolen keys and/or keycards immediately. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall be responsible for the cost of replacement and/or re-keying of a building as applicable as a result of loss or theft.
Security Contractor/Vendor References: [LAB: isn’t this Procurement turf?] The Security Consultant shall work with the Owner’s Authorized Representative to include in the Supplemental Terms and Conditions the requirement for the bidding Security Contractor/Vendors to provide the following documentation at the time of bid. DAS shall have sufficient time during the bidding and bid review process, prior to final award of Contract, to review the submitted reference information and report their findings and/or recommendations to the Contract team. Lack of response by a Security Contractor/Vendor shall invalidate their bid. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide the following new project references at the time of bid (A “new project” may be a building meeting the guidelines below, but added to an existing campus system): A minimum of five (5) references of new installations in Oregon. The references must be of systems of sufficient complexity to show the vendor’s familiarity with Lenel access control systems. The following are the minimum requirements for the references: The systems used as references must include Lenel access control of at least 10 doors connected to an Intelligent System Controller and communicating with the “host” at a central location via TCP/IP. When the project requires integration of systems (IDS and/or Digital Video Management System with Access Control System) at least two (2) references must be integration projects similar in size and scope. The references shall include a description of the project, and the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of contact persons. Integration projects should describe the level and complexity of integration. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide the following Long Term Service references at the time of bid: The Security Contractor/Vendor should provide a minimum of three (3) References where the Contractor has installed and maintained the Lenel system for a minimum of two (2) years. The references shall include a description of the project, and the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of contact persons. These references shall not be the same as the new project reference required above. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide resumes for the following: Key personnel as indicated above, and with the requirements as stated. Résumés must be complete and concise, featuring directly relevant experience to the individual’s task responsibility. Résumés must include dates of education, experience, employment, and state the functions to be performed on the project by each of the key personnel. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide a Project organization chart indicating the following: All key personnel involved with the project, including all Security Contractor/Vendor technicians and their designated responsibilities.
All lines of communication including those with DAS, construction team, and design team. The vendor shall identity the technical support personnel responsible for computer, network, application and database support. List all pertinent education and certifications that relate to the project requirements. All documentation, references, certifications, resumes etc. required in this Section shall be duplicated and provided as submittals to DAS for their record. This will include design build projects.
THEORY OF DESIGN AND OPERATION All Access Control System doors, unless stipulated otherwise, shall be “free egress” at all times. “Free Egress” shall mean that no special knowledge is required to exit the door. To this end, the use of electro-magnetic locks (“maglocks”) shall not be used, unless approved by DAS and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Electric strikes shall not be used on exterior doors. Exterior doors shall use mortise case devices, electric locks or panic devices when controlled by access control systems. When Auto Operators are required, electric latch retraction (EL) panic bars shall be used. These electric latch devices may require special power supplies. These shall meet all the requirements of DAS’ standard power supplies including battery backup (the power supplies standard battery backup may be utilized) and supervision. The preferred method for locking interior access control doors that do not require panic devices shall be electrified mortise case locks. The following exceptions are allowed: When the risk assessment indicates that a less resilient lock will suffice such as an electrified cylindrical lock set. An Auto Operator is required on the interior door, and an EL device has been deemed too costly, or the handing of the door prevents the EL installation, an electric strike may be installed. A latch guard may be required to be affixed to the door. A retrofit installation does not make it physically or financially reasonable to install a mortise lock. Double doors shall be designed as two independent single doors using the following methods: Aluminum “storefront” doors and hollow metal frame doors shall have a “built” mullion between the doors. The width of this mullion shall be the minimum required to affect a secure opening based on accepted construction methods for the materials used. Figures “A” and “B” depict this configuration. When the use of the facility mandates the use of a double door with a removable mullion, a keyed removable mullion shall be used. Removable mullions shall not be used for a wire path to any component. Electric strikes shall not be used with removable mullions.
Figure A: Hollow Metal Double Door with Interposed Removable Mullion
Figure B: Enlargement of Interposed Removable Mullion
The Security Consultant should be aware of operational considerations that may require them to advise the Owner’s Authorized Representative and/or DAS on the design considerations. The following are some examples of that may arise: Lobby Reception: A lobby reception desks should be constructed, when the personnel have direct access to the “secured area” via an Access Control System door, so that during an emergency the Reception personnel can exit the area without having to travel through the Access Control System door. Stairwell doors in building more than four (4) stories in height require unlocking of the stairwell doors during a fire alarm. The Security Consultant should confer with DAS to confirm their desire to unlock the stairwell doors during other emergencies such as earthquake. In addition to the interface of the stairwell doors and fire alarm system an “emergency release” button may be desired. It should be located in a discreet location where only senior management and key personnel have knowledge of its existence and access to it. An option may be to use a key- operated switch with key personnel having that key in their possession. If required, software configurations may be used to make the “emergency release” inoperable after normal business hours. Roof access shall be secured on both sides of the door and provided with a card reader on each side of the door. All main roof access doors shall unlock during a fire alarm. Consideration should be given to fire rated openings to ensure they stay latched during a fire alarm but are also accessible
from either side without the use of a key or keycard. Emergency release is required on the roof “side” of the door. Alternatively, an emergency phone/intercom may be considered. The position of a card reader for an Automatic Operator door should be carefully considered. The desired location is to be 4’ to 6’ from the door, pedestal mounted, and offset by approximately 6” from a line perpendicular to the jamb edge of the door. If this position is not possible, then alternative solutions should be suggested to DAS for their approval. The situation to be avoided in this configuration is where a wheelchair bound person has to reposition themselves to allow the door to open. It is also required to have the door operator “paddle” immediately adjacent to the card reader. Unless specifically required by DAS, the interior paddle of the Automatic Operator shall be configured to “shunt” the door position switch, unlock the door, and power the door open. The system shall be configured to allow the door to unlock prior to the Automatic Operator commencing its opening function. When the door is locked, and access is required from the non-secured side, a valid credential presentation shall unlock the door and require manual use of the exterior Automatic Operator paddle. The Security Consultant shall reference the specific door details for the required operation. If the door type has not been previously configured, the Security Consultant shall confirm the sequence of operation with DAS.
Elevator Floor Control and Floor Tracking The Security Consultant shall work with DAS to determine the appropriate access control application for each elevator and/or bank of elevators in a specific building. The potential options are: Basic access control which has a card reader on the outside of the designated elevator lobby, and when a valid card is presented, it shall make the “call” button active, allowing the elevator to be called or allow the door to open if already there. Floor control shall require a card reader in each elevator cab and require interface to the floor call buttons. Presentation of a valid card shall make the programmed floor call buttons “active”. Floor tracking shall be similar to floor control with the additional aspect of requiring an input to the Access Control System for each floor button selected after a valid card presentation. All elevators shall be configured as follows: Floor control shall be designed for each floor served by an elevator or bank of elevators. Space shall be made available for adding the components necessary for “floor tracking” in each elevator access control cabinet (EAC) for all floors served by an elevator or bank of elevators in the future when floor control only is initially selected. The Elevator Access Control Cabinet shall be in its own enclosure, and contain only the Access Control System components necessary to provide the appropriate. The Security Consultant should confirm the functional requirements of the elevator control and floor tracking with DAS and tenants prior to finalization of the design. Each elevator machine room shall have a dedicated Elevator Access Control Cabinet with its own associated power supply. No other Access Control System functions may be associated with the Elevator Access Control Cabinet.
Supervised inputs: The monitoring of the power supply as required by other Sections of this Section shall be performed from inputs at the SEC, and home-run (See Glossary) to the EAC. The power supply cabinet tampers and E Elevator Access Control Cabinet AC tamper switch may be monitored from the designated tamper inputs on the 1100, 1200, and 1300 modules. The Security Consultant shall be prepared to assist the AE with the elevator traveler cable required for the associated Access Control System functions. Additionally, the Security Consultant shall assist in determining the demarcation of connections between the elevator control Contractor’s requirements and the Security Contractor/Vendor. The Lenel Access Control System requires software licensing for additional readers in 64 unit phases. The Security Consultant should confer with DAS prior to finalization of the specification to see if additional licensing is needed. The Security Consultant should confer with DAS, to determine the Reader Numbers, reader naming, input and output naming, alarm descriptions etc. that will be assigned to each specific door or alarm point. These should be reflected throughout the documentation created for the project. DAS shall have the sole authority for all naming of readers, inputs, outputs, alarm descriptions etc.
Warranties and Maintenance Labor Warranty: The labor warranty shall consist of a one (1) year warranty beginning from the date of DAS acceptance. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall repair or replace without charge to DAS, any equipment or part thereof, which fails in operation during normal use within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of the system. This shall not apply to failures caused by acts of God or extraordinary cir- cumstances beyond the control of the Security Contractor/Vendor. Included in the warranty labor will be the following response times, based on a 24x365 schedule, for the Security Contractor/Vendor to respond to warranty issues. Call back to DAS by a certified technician within one (1) hour of receipt of initial call at 24-hour telephone number. DAS shall have to call only one (1) telephone number no matter what time of day the call is placed. A certified technician responds onsite with four (4) hours of receipt of initial call at 24-hour telephone number. Equipment/Material Warranty: The vendor/Contractor shall submit a warranty matrix with submittals, indicating the manufacturer’s factory warranty period for all equipment and materials used on this project. The minimum equipment/material warranty shall consist of a one – (1) year warranty beginning from the date of DAS acceptance. The vendor/Contractor shall repair or replace without charge to DAS, any equip- ment or part thereof, which fails in operation during normal use for the balance of the warranty period, noted in the matrix above, from the date of acceptance of the system. Any repair or replacement that takes place after the initial first year of warranty shall have shipping and/or labor charges applied to it. The extended manufacturer’s warranty shall not apply to failures caused by acts of God or extraordinary cir- cumstances beyond the control of the Security Contractor/Vendor. The warranty matrix shall be revised at the end of the project, and it shall indicate the start date and end dates of each warranty period. Submit with O&M Manual/Record Drawings a Warranty Letter reflecting all pertinent information required above. Maintenance: The Security Contractor/Vendor shall perform all of the maintenance, servicing, removal, and replacement of defective parts, adjustments, and measurements to maintain the equipment supplied under
this Contract to the manufacturer's specifications and requirements of the FCC for a period of one (1) year from the date of DAS's acceptance of the system. This shall be at no additional cost to DAS for those services requested for malfunctions reported 24 hours a day. The Security Consultant shall outline in the specification all maintenance features that will be required of the Security Contractor/Vendor in the first year. DAS will perform all necessary services, but should there be services required that are beyond the capacity or capability of DAS, these services should be included in the specification. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall have a technician that has been trained in and is competent to maintain the supplied equipment on twenty four (24) hour call at all times. When a malfunction is reported and service is requested, the Security Contractor/Vendor's technician shall be en route to the equipment location to effect emergency repairs within four 4 hours after the Security Contractor/Vendor or his or her representative was notified by DAS. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide the names of the persons who shall be the primary contact point for service, complaints, and general inquiries. Their names, addresses, and telephone numbers shall be given to DAS. The Security Contractor/Vendor must stock and maintain a quantity at least one (1) of each Lenel module used on the project to ensure a replacement of failed components in a timely manner while in the warranty period. All components shall be deliverable the next business day. Between 0800 hour and 1700 hour, Monday through Friday. After 1700 and before 2400 hours, Monday through Friday. After 2400 and before 0800 hours, Monday through Friday. Saturday, Sunday, and holidays.
Contract Closeout: The Security Contractor/Vendor shall test and demonstrate the system when each phase of the work is completed to assure that all portions are functional according to the design intent. Provide all labor and equipment necessary to conduct these tests. Instruct DAS's staff thoroughly in the proper operation of apparatus and controls at the time of substantial completion of each phase of the work. DAS will perform follow-up testing to confirm results provided by the Security Contractor/Vendor as accurate and complete. Any discrepancies will be reported to the Security Contractor/Vendor for correction. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall on completion of each phase of the installation, secure the approval of DAS and Consultant for the scope of work covered during the installation phase. If permits are required for the phase of work (the Security Contractor/Vendor having previously paid for and obtained the permit) secure a certificate of approval from the public authorities having jurisdiction. Submit a final inspection certificate for all permitted work to DAS and Consultant prior to request for final payment. NOTE SPECIFICALLY; Contractor to pay any and all cost incurred for inspection fees. Deliverables for Project Closeout: Upon completion of the project the Security Contractor/Vendor will turn over the following: Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit two (2) copies of closeout manuals prior to requesting final payment.
Prepare data in the form of instructional manuals for use by DAS. Use 8½” by 11” manual format in 3 ring binder. Include table of contents, Section tabs, and title for the manual. Manuals shall include manufacturer’s specifications for all devices and components. Matrix containing inputs and outputs descriptions, including name, type, the module number, function description of input/output. Operating instructions. Maintenance and repair procedures. All necessary local permits, inspections, and completion notices. Provide one (1) CD-ROM with the above noted materials in a Microsoft Word format if available. PDF format is acceptable if this is the only format available digitally. The CD-ROM shall be organized with a hyper-linked table of contents that replicate the hard copy O&M Manual. Include all of the following components in the CD version. Drawings: Provide drawings in the following formats (this is in addition to the drawings required at the Security Equipment Cabinet and Elevator Access Control Cabinet locations: Provide plotted drawings of the recorded layout including all aspects of the approved shop drawings including: Two (2) set of “D” size drawings. One (1) set of ½ size “D” size drawings. Provide CAD electronic copies of all the drawings in the following formats on CD-ROM: DWG files saved for AutoCAD 2000 or later.
Drawing Requirements (for both shop drawings and record drawings): The drawing shall include an accurate line drawing of all boards, LAN communication devices, fuses, isolation relays, power distribution terminals, data distribution terminals, and the appropriate conductors between them. Each conductor shall be labeled. Provide electrical schematic drawings for all electrical power supplies and external devices connected to the system. Post a detailed floor plan diagram with the equipment locations shown in relation to the building’s details. The as-built floor plan must incorporate detailed call outs. At least one call out shall lead from each device location icon. All icons shall be described in a Legend Table on each drawing. Each call out shall incorporate the following: device #, device description, cable routing, door detail, and cable code. Exception to routing of cabling on floor plans shall be for those facilities where existing wiring is being used in the upgrade of an existing system. Should DAS be able to provide cable routing on the floor plan, to provide cable routing on the floor plan, the Security Contractor/Vendor shall incorporate into the Record Drawings. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall not be responsible for the accuracy of the information conveyed from DAS. A separate call out shall exist for each low voltage cable run and shall define the routing of each individual cable run. Each cable run may consist of any number of wires and shall be described in a Cable Definitions Table.
The Cable Definitions table shall list the necessary wires and conductors to be included in each cable run. The table shall be split up into a header labeled with the name of the table, and four columns. The columns shall each have a label at the top: Code, Type, Wire, and Belden number. Code shall refer to the Cable Code in the call out. Type shall refer to an abbreviated description of what the individual wires will be used for. Wire shall define the wire that will be used to make up this cable run. The Belden column shall give a Belden Wire number. Drawings must include control diagrams, flow diagrams and system relationships. Comply with Division 1 Contract closeout requirements and the Supplementary Conditions.
Customer Training: The Security Consultant shall coordinate with DAS and the Tenants to determine the exact level training required on a project by project basis, and accurately reflect those requirements within the specification. A typical training would consist of a minimum of 4 hours. Care should be taken to assure that the Tenants who may operate Access Control System client workstations, Intrusion Detection System keypads, and Digital Video Management System controls are trained in a manner that will allow them the ability to use the system on a daily basis.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ACCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT DAS has brand name/manufacturer exemptions for distinctive components and systems integral to the physical security of DAS buildings. The following are the approved manufacturers for the “major” systems.
Access Control System ACS shall be a Lenel OnGuard Pro. DAS standard does not support integration between Intrusion Detection System and Access Control Systems. Integration is highly discouraged between the two systems. Any and all integration must have prior approval by DAS O&M Security Shop. Intrusion alarm systems in DAS owned buildings would be at the tenant request, management, and expense. Any such intrusion alarm system must have a “DAS code” programmed in to allow DAS maintenance access to secured areas, unless otherwise agreed upon in advance. When Security Intercom System is required, Aiphone is the preferred manufacturer. The existing Access Control System Lenel OnGuard Pro (host) server is located at 1257 Ferry Street Southeast; Salem, Oregon. The Security Consultant shall coordinate with DAS for software upgrades required for each project. This typically can include a Lenel OnGuard PRO-64RUP reader capacity upgrade. All hardware provided must be 100% compatible with the existing Lenel server and field hardware currently installed other DAS facilities. 100% compatibility includes verification through the communications server of valid hardware serial numbers. The following are the system components furnished by Lenel. Intelligent System Controller The Intelligent System Controller shall be located in the first enclosure of the SEC.
Port Configuration shall be standardized as follows: Port 2 shall support all ICM and OCM functions not associated with Access Control System doors. There shall be a Lenel 8000 (MUX) board connected to this port, and all of the ICM/OCMs shall be connected to the MUX – up to eight per MUX. Ports 3 and 4 shall have LENEL 8000 (MUX) boards connected to them. In turn, all of the SRIs or DRIs shall be connected to these MUX boards – up to eight per MUX. Port 5 shall support up to two (2) Elevator Control and Floor Tracking “panels”. When an elevator is not in the building, Port 5 may be used to “spread” the load of DRIs over the three (3) ports. When required by DAS, the Security Consultant shall specify an external 56K modem with power inverter to convert 12VDC to 120VAC. Inverter, modem, and duplex outlet should be contained in a separate enclosure and shall be battery backed up. The Intelligent System Controller shall be specified to have 4MB of memory at the time of installation. All network communications devices shall be Lenel Cobox Micro100 or approved Thin Servers. Input Control Module The ICM shall be used to monitor ancillary inputs such as cabinet tamper switches, power supply status, and other necessary inputs. Spare inputs on a SRI or a DRI shall not be used for these functions.
Output Control Module Single Reader Interface Module (SRI): This module is typically used for retrofit applications. Dual Reader Interface Module (DRI): This is the preferred reader interface module. Auxiliary inputs and outputs on each DR1 shall be used exclusively for the door controlled by that DRI only. The inputs shall not be used to monitor power supply status or various cabinet tampers. Star Configuration Splitters (MUX) MUXs shall be used to facilitate “home-run” (See Glossary) wiring configurations. In this configuration point to point wiring should be used. As an example the data wire would come from the door module in the field directly into the MUX without utilizing the Terminal Block Module at the SEC. Unless specifically approved by DAS, these field located modules will not be “daisy-chained” together. This includes the associated 12VDC and 24VDC power requirements MUX modules shall not be located in the field under any condition. MUX modules shall be located in the same enclosure as the Intelligent System Controller whenever possible or in close proximity. Proximity Card Readers The HID ProxPro Card Reader is the preferred reader by DAS. It shall be controlled and configured via the OnGuard Pro software. The tamper switch shall be monitored. The ProxPro unit also offers an optional integrated keypad for PIN entry. The HID ThinLine Card Reader shall be used for existing applications where the ProxPro will not physically fit in the space allowed. The HID MiniProx Card Reader shall be utilized for aluminum storefront applications where the reader is not required to be mounted away from the door for auto operation, and no other viable mounting location exists.
The HID MaxiProx Extended Range Card Reader shall be used when requested by DAS or Tenant. This reader will require a separate power source and power wiring independent of the reader cabling. The preferred voltage is 24VDC. Access Control System Power Supplies Altronix AL600ULM Access Control System power supplies is the standard. Battery backup shall consist of 35ah batteries (Werker or approved equal) configured to support 12VDC or 24VDC. Batteries shall be installed in a Bosch BATB-80 or DAS Approved Substitution. The Security Consultant shall specify that the Security Contractor/Vendor shall provide battery calculations, reflecting the actual load capacity for each power supply. This calculation shall indicate each fused power output on the respective power supply. The current load on the overall power supply shall not exceed 4.2-Amperes, or 70% of the rated capacity. The current load shall be distributed equally between all 12VDC outputs. At no time shall the power limited circuits of the power supply exceed 1.75-amperes per output, or 70% of the rated capacity. Each power supply shall be individually monitored for each condition: AC Fail. DC Fail Battery Fail. Power Supply Cabinet Tamper. Battery Cabinet Tamper. The Security Contractor/Vendor is responsible for programming each alarm condition to notify by email the keycard shop manager and the keycard shop supervisor. No more than one (1) conductor shall be under any given termination within a power supply. When more than one connections are required for a given output, a distribution terminal block shall be located within the SEC. The following guidelines are to be used when determining power supply requirements: The Intelligent System Controller shall be directly connected to its own designated power output in the power supply. The ICM and OCM modules may be “daisy-chained” on the same power output with up to 3 modules within the same Security Equipment Cabinet enclosure. MUX modules may be powered from this power supply. Each power circuit for a MUX shall be home run (See Glossary) from the respective power supply terminal to the MUX 12VDC input. 12VDC to the SRI and/or DRIs associated with that power supply, and those relays and devices requiring 12VDC. 24VDC to the door locking device and/or the long range reader associated with that door. When IR/Schlage “L” Series electrified mortise locks are used, the power supplies shall be limited to no more than three (3) locks per power supply with no other 24VDC functions on that power supply. Each power supply shall be labeled with “##VDC – ‘__’. The ## shall reflect the voltage output of either 12 or 24 volts direct current, and the blank shall be filled in with the correlating letter (A, B, C, D etc.). When possible, all power supplies shall be connected to the building’s emergency power system. When possible, all power supplies shall be connected to the building’s emergency power system.
Line voltage for power supplies may be “daisy-chained” off the same 120VAC circuit so long as the load does not exceed the requirements of the Electrical Code. A quick-disconnect shall be used on the 120VAC terminal of each power supply. The quick-disconnect shall have the hot and neutral wires from the line side enclosed in one female nylon housing which will plug into a male nylon housing containing the hot and neutral wires of the step down transformer. The housings shall have at the minimum passive (friction) locking ramp to aid in securing the two parts together. Molex part numbers that may be considered are 02-09-2101, 03- 09-1022, 03-09-1022, and 02-09-1102. Request-To-Exit (REX) Sensors shall be used on all doors that require “free exiting” during an alarmed state. The sensor shall be a Detection Systems DS160i Series or DAS approved substitution. Provide REX sensor for each door requiring electromechanical locking (includes card reader doors) and per the locations noted on the Contract documents and meeting the following requirements: Sensor shall operate from 12VDC power source. The sensor shall be configured using mounting orientation and height, angle of the lens, and masking wedges to provide the following coverage: Single door – 4 feet wide by 2.5 feet deep (tight to door). Double door - 10 feet wide by 2.5 feet deep (tight to door). The sensor shall operate in fail-secure mode, so that a loss of power will not shunt the door contacts. The timer shall be configured with Switch 2 “Off”, and the timer shall be valid for 1 second upon cessation of motion. Door Contacts shall be furnished as follows: General requirements: All door contacts shall have their contact in a closed state when the associated door is closed. Contacts shall have the magnetic, reed switch, and the required end of line resistor potted and hermetically sealed with the reed switch in the housing of the contact. The EOL resistor values shall be 1K ohm/1K ohm. When possible provide all wire leads and/or stainless steel flexible conduit with sufficient length to reach the appropriate junction box with no splicing. George Risk Industries (GRI) and GE Sentrol have been specified as the standard of quality to be met. Wood frame doors shall use recessed door contacts. Surface mounted door contacts shall not be used unless prior approval by DAS. New construction “man” doors using hollow metal frames or aluminum storefront shall use concealed, steel door contacts utilizing an ANSI cutout. These contacts shall have the following features: Contact and magnet shall fit an ANSI prepped cutout on steel or aluminum framed doors. Both the contact and magnet shall be constructed of one piece of thick walled, flame retardant ABS plastic, and secured to an ANSI plate. The contact shall be a GE 1090-G or approved. New construction “person” doors using wood doors and/or frames shall utilize “press-to-fit” contacts. These contacts shall have the following features: Contact shall fit a 3/8” hole prepared on a wood door frame.
Magnet shall fit a 3/8” hole prepared on a wood frame. Magnet shall fit a ¾” or 1” hole prepared on a steel frame. Both the contact and magnet shall be constructed of one piece of thick walled, flame retardant ABS plastic. The contact shall have terminals for connecting the circuit to it. The contacts shall be the following: Wood doors with wood or aluminum frames: 20T with M-16 magnet. Wood doors with steel frames: GRI 184-12 switch with GRI M-16 magnet. Surface Mounted Contacts for Overhead Doors, Gates, Coiling Grills, etc shall have the following features: Mounting holes shall be on 2” centers. Provide appropriate mounting bracket for each specific application. Provide length of stainless steel flexible conduit for wiring leads as required above. Both the contact and magnet shall be constructed in a brushed anodized aluminum tube housing. The contact and magnet should be rated and approved for exterior applications. Provide GRI 200/250 Series or approved. For existing doors or unique new door configurations the Security Consultant shall propose an appropriate contact to DAS that meets the general requirements outlined above. When Intrusion Detection systems require the monitoring of the same door as an access control door a double pole switch shall be used. A preference would be that each pole’s leads would have the correct end- of-line resistors hermetically sealed as a single component. Miscellaneous Equipment shall be furnished to provide a complete and operational system. Significant components are listed in the following, however, Security Consultant should ensure when writing the project specification that all major and significant components are covered in the specification. Enclosures for SECs (ISC, ICM, OCM, SRI, DRI, and MUX) shall be NEMA 1 rated enclosure with the following features: All enclosures (including power supplies and battery enclosures) shall be keyed alike using the Lenel “E002”. A single key shall gain access to all enclosures. DAS can supply a copy of the key if needed. Provide Hoffman A36N30ALP enclosure with A36N30MP plate or DAS Approved Substitution for equipment enclosures. Enclosures for TBCs shall be of the following minimum configurations: Terminal Block Cabinet with Terminal Block Module only shall be Hoffman A08N0804 enclosure with A08N08P plate or DAS Approved Substitution. Terminal Block Cabinet with Terminal Block Module and remote module(s) shall be Hoffman A12N1204 enclosure with A12N12P plate or DAS Approved Substitution. When configurations require multiple remote modules in the same enclosure, the Security Consultant shall determine the minimum/maximum size allowed. When a Terminal Block Cabinet must be used for an outdoor application, or any application in which moisture may be a problem, furnish an appropriately sized lockable fiberglass enclosure as manufactured by Hoffman or DAS Approved Substitution. Provide with snap lock to assure tight fit. When rating is not an issue provide a lock keyed to (E002). Lock with DAS provided padlock when NEMA 4 rating is an issue. The Security Consultant shall specify model series appropriate for application. The Security Contractor/Vendor is responsible for assuring all applicable UL listing, such as UL508, have been complied with.
Lay-In Type 1 Painted Flat Cover Wireway shall be an open wireway for routing cabling and conduit at equipment enclosure locations. The Security Consultant shall specify the required sizes on the required detailed elevation drawing Gutter is required unless a single Security Equipment Cabinet enclosure and its associated power supplies are close-nippled together. The Security Consultant shall depict the desired size and layout in the elevation drawings. Capacity shall be the designed so as to allow 20% additional wiring (based on cross sectional area), and to not exceed the limit allowed by the NEC when the additional wire is installed. Specify and provide the manufacturer’s accessories for wireway such as tees and elbows. Covers to be secured with Torx Plus screws. “Finger Duct” shall be provided for a wire routing system, for the purpose of routing, segregating, and protecting the various cabling types required in the control panels. Finger duct shall be mounted to the back plate of the equipment panels only. Mounting finger duct to any other part of the enclosure is not permitted. The finger duct shall be provided with snap on covers and fittings as necessary for a clean and workmanlike installation. The manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used at all time. Standard sizes shall be: “A” – 1.75” W x 4.12” H. “B” – 3.25” W x 4.11” H. Provide Panduit Type “G” wiring duct or DAS Approved Substitution. Heat Shrink Laser Labels shall be used to mark wiring as required by this Section. The heat shrink label shall have the following characteristics: Material type: polyolefin. White, ¼” diameter Rated for plenum spaces. Text shall be Arial font, 12 point. Provide Panduit or DAS Approved Substitution. All enclosures shall be labeled with engraved plastic laminated Micarta labels with an adhesive backing to secure to the panels. Labels shall not be mounted to enclosures with screws. Lettering shall be 1” high and white in light blue background. The Security Consultant shall require that samples be submitted with the shop drawings. Labeling shall be as indicated in Attachment “B” for all panels. (If a panel type is not included in Attachment “B”, submit labeling scheme for approval with submittals.) When a project requires surface mounting of raceway in a location conduit is not acceptable the Security Consultant shall specify “Interior Surface Mounted, Metallic Raceway”. The raceway shall be Wire mold V700 series or DAS Approved Substitution. Terminal Blocks, Fuses, and Relays shall be DIN rail mounted as noted in detail drawings. To maintain consistency a typical installation of DIN rail mounted terminal blocks would include mounting them vertically on the right side of the enclosure with all wire from field devices connected to the right side of the terminal blocks. The terminal block shall consist of a series of Phoenix brand series DIN rail mounted fuses, and screw down terminals, and DIN rail mounted Idec relays. Relay terminal block shall be a minimum of Idec SY2S-05 OR approved equal with appropriately rated plug-in relays. These should be identical to those in existing DAS access control enclosures unless substitutes are approved. The SY2S-05 relay base shall be an exception to the “left/right” rule for panel and field wiring. Please see appropriate details for clarification.
TABLE 3 – SEC/TBC TERMINALS AN D RELAYS
Part # Manufacturer/Description Model
3004362 Phoenix Terminal Block, Pass Thru UK -5N
2812018 Phoenix Terminal Block Fuse Holder UK4 -TG
O921011 Phoenix Fuse Holder Cartridge ST -SI -UK4
N/A Idec Relay, 24V -3A w/Diode on Coil Input RY2S -UD -DC24V
N/A Idec Relay, 12V -3A w/Diode on Coil Input RY2S -UD -DC12V
N/A Idec Socket, Relay SY2S -05
3003020 Phoenix End Cover for Terminal Block D-UK 4/10
3003224 Phoenix Separating Plate, Required between 120VAC and low ATP -UK voltage monitoring relays and between associated groups of relays
GGM -1A Gould Fuse, 1A Fast Blow 5 x20mm GGM -1A
GGM -3A Gould Fuse, 3A Fast Blow 5x20mm GGM -3A
GGM -5A Gould Fuse, 5A Fast Blow 5x20mm GGM -5A
O800886 Phoenix End Clamp E-NS35N
O801733 Phoenix Din Rail, Perforated NS35/7.5
TABLE 4 – PS873 MONITORING REL AYS
Part # Manufacturer/Description Model
2967235 Phoenix PLC Relay, 12 VDC, 6 Amp Contact (Base and PLC -RSC -12DC/21 -21 Relay)
2967060 Phoenix PLC Relay, 24 VDC, 6 Amp Contact (Base and PLC -RSC -24DC/21 -21 Relay)
2967138 Phoenix PLC Relay, 120 VAC, 50mA Contact (Base and PLC -RSC -120UC/21 -21AU Relay)
Tamper Resistant Fasteners: Use only stainless steel screws with Torx Plus head design for exposed fasteners on Access Control System devices and equipment for all locations. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall ensure that the proper screw head and threading are used. As an example, if the ANSI door contact requires a “pan-head” type screw it shall be furnished. Enclosure Tamper Switches shall be provided for each enclosure furnished with project, furnish a “plunger” type enclosure tamper switch. Provide Seco-Larm or DAS Approved Substitution. Transient Surge Protection shall be provided for all security system related devices that are mounted remotely from the building at gates or poles. The purpose of the surge protection shall be to protect the head end components from a transient surge or lightning strike. Provide Transtector DRDC surge suppressor or DAS Approved Substitution. Quick Disconnects shall be furnished for the following applications: 120VAC quick disconnect of 120VAC circuit to power supplies. Molex part numbers that may be considered are 02-09-2101, 03-09-1022, 03-09-1022, and 02-09-1102. Low voltage quick disconnects for wiring to electrified door locking hardware. Molex Versa BladeTM connectors shall be utilized at the locking device for six (6), four (4), or two (2) conductors as indicated in the detail. All connectors shall have a positive latching feature. Firestopping shall comply with other Sections of DAS standard that address this issue. Supports for “open” wiring shall comply with the Electrical Code and DAS Electrical standards. Raceways shall be provided on new installations whenever possible from an accessible junction box to all switches, strikes, transfer hinges, REXs and keycard readers. The term “accessible” means no more than 18 inches in height above the ceiling grid and at no time shall exceed 12 feet above the floor.
Closed Circuit Television CCTV EQUIPMENT DAS has brand name/manufacturer exemptions for distinctive components and systems integral to the Physical Security of DAS buildings. The Digital Video Management System shall be a Lenel OnGuard to provide complete integration with Access Control System functionality. Specific components of the Digital Video Management System will not be discussed here, due to the rapidly changing nature of the security video market. It is the intent of DAS to use networked video (TCP/IP) cameras and recorders as practical for the specific application. At a minimum, when “analog” cameras are used on a project, the wiring infrastructure shall utilize unshielded, twisted pair (UTP) comprised of a minimum of CAT-5E cabling. The cabling shall follow layout requirements for networked components, i.e. no more than 300’ per individual wire run. This will facilitate the migration to network devices at a future date. Exterior cameras that may be readily accessed from the ground should use coaxial cable or fiber optics for video transmission until securely within the building. All camera recording shall have the capability of recording up to 30 images per second (IPS) uncompressed. The desired storage capacity for all digital video recorders (DVR) shall be 30-days for a fully configured (all video inputs connected) DVR at the maximum record rate of 30 IPS. The desired storage capacity for network video recorders (NVR) and/or server based recording shall be 30- days with all required cameras connected plus 20%.
All AC powered components of the D Digital Video Management System VMS shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source (UPS). The calculated battery size will be a minimum of 2-hours for a fully connected load. Battery size may be reduced to 45-minutes when the UPS is powered from an auto-start emergency generator. The UPS shall be rack-mounted whenever possible. DAS has previously used MGE UPS System Model 3000/3000XL with EXB Battery Modules. Due to the software nature of the UPS, DAS would prefer to standardize on this manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION PRACTICES Panel Labels: “ISC #__” for the enclosure housing the Intelligent System Enclosure and associated modules. (Provide program # of Intelligent System Controller in blank, if panel contains more than one ISC, then provide those numbers with a “/” between them, i.e. “ISC #1/2”) P/S shall be labeled as follows: For 12VDC and 24VDC power supplies where the blank is the sequential letter associated with the power supply and the ## is the voltage. ## VDC- “_”. For EL power supplies where the blank is the reader number associated with the power supply. ELPS – RDR “_”. The letter designation needs to be unique for each power supply and sequentially ordered in each building regardless of type and voltage of power supply. Should a system exceed 26 power supplies, the designation would change to AA, AB, etc. “RDR #__” for reader module enclosures. If multiple reader modules are housed with the enclosure, provide separate label for each associated reader. The two readers for a DRI can be put on the same label with a “/” between them. “BATT ______” for cabinet containing batteries for associated power supply. The blank shall be filled in with the information noted for the power supplies noted above. When the enclosure contains multiple batteries, arrange the labels on the exterior to reflect the position of the batteries contained within. Labels shall be affixed with adhesive to secure to the panels.
Panel Wiring Information: The following drawings shall be furnished for each location as indicated. All drawings described in this Section shall be printed in color. SEC: The “main” Security Equipment Cabinet locations shall have one set of full-size “D” “record drawings” folded and inserted into a pocket attached to the interior of an enclosure door. Use the manufacturer’s standard “pocket” listed with the enclosure. Provide each unique door configuration, Page 2 of each door detail, laminated and placed in pocket noted in B.1.a.1) above. This would include ADA door configuration. Provide a copy of all unique door details and place in pocket noted in B.1.a.1) above. These do not need to be laminated. Elevator Access Control Cabinet and Remote SEC:
The Elevator Access Control Cabinet and remote Security Equipment Cabinet locations shall have all of the relevant “record drawings” (full-size “D”) associated with that location folded and inserted into a pocket attached to the interior of an enclosure door. Use the manufacturer’s standard “pocket” listed with the enclosure. Each cable that enters or leaves an enclosure shall be labeled as required in the labeling portion of this specification. All system component wiring shall be configured identical to other Access Control panels in other DAS owned building in order to maintain consistency at all wiring termination points. Any variation from this standard of installation will be considered non-compliant and unacceptable. See the Attachments associated with this Section as an example of the quality expected in workmanship and drawings.
Wiring: All wiring shall be home-run (See Glossary) from the Security Equipment Cabinet to the TBC. The only exception to this may be Intrusion Detection System devices that are zone or wired on an addressable circuit. There shall be no splices in any wiring. Surge protection shall be given due consideration by the Security Consultant during the design process, and appropriate surge protection shall be specified. Terminations that do not require Molex connectors shall be made with a soldered lineman’s splice and encased in heat shrink tubing. The use of “Beanies” is not acceptable unless prior approval by DAS. If “Beanies” are used the wires must first be soldered and then wrapped with electrical tape.
INSTALLATION PRACTICES As provided in DAS Electrical Standards all security wiring shall have a green jacket except as noted in attachment “C” “Cable Legend”. Programming: This will be the method by which the Security Contractor/Vendor determines their programming requirements. DAS shall provide the following programming and information: Access Levels. Time Zones. Cardholder Information. Specific naming conventions for doors and alarm points, etc. The Contractor shall provide all other programming (not included above) necessary for a complete and operational system. DAS will furnish the Security Contractor/Vendor with a PC that has access to the Access Control System network for programming, however; the PC shall be located in a location that allows for security and control of that device by DAS. Exceptions to this will require pre-approval by DAS Keycard shop and are subject to additional screening by DAS computer technology staff. All input/output programming shall be achieved utilizing “local” I/O’s. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall inform DAS prior to commencing programming if any configurations will require “global” programming to facilitate implementation.
Any requirements for global programming shall be approved by DAS prior to finalization of the specification. Observation and Testing: DAS and/or their designated representative (typically the Security Consultant) reserve the right to observe and test any portion of the equipment and/or materials during the progress of its erection. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall test all wiring for proper connection, continuity, and resistance to ground. The Security Consultant shall create a specification that requires the Security Contractor/Vendor to submit documentation prior to DAS acceptance testing indicating that all wiring is free of grounds, shorts, faults, opens, and has the correct voltage on the circuit. The Security Contractor/Vendor shall submit samples of the verification forms with submittals. The Security Consultant shall outline in the specification any “phased-in” testing of the system that may be required to demonstrate functionality prior to final acceptance testing.
END OF SECTION 16725 SECURITY
Section 16780 DAS LIGHTING STANDARDS
Date: June 25, 2018
Basic Standard- Lighting:
Modifications to Department of Administrative Services (DAS) owned or operated buildings must support building surfaces, structures, and systems; conform to codes; and be safe for occupants. They must be cost effective in design, construction, installation, maintenance, and operation. For these reasons, DAS maintains and requires conformance to Technical Standards that exceed state and local minimum codes. For the purposes of this standard, DAS and Enterprise Asset Management (EAM) have been used interchangeably.
This Standard is supplemental to any other standard by DAS.
NOTE: Use of the term occupancy sensor and vacancy sensor is synonymous in this standard. Use Vacancy programmed sensors or Occupancy programmed sensor as required by Code. DAS prefers use of Occupancy Sensors whenever possible instead of Vacancy Sensors.
Definitions: DAS- Department of Administrative Services, Enterprise Asset Management Department, specifically the DAS Project Manager. Owner- Owner of the Building; Owner may or may not be DAS; however, when DAS is involved, it will be clear if the DAS Project Manager is the Owner’s Representative. Not every State of Oregon property/building is managed by DAS Electrical Manager/DAS Electrical Manager - Specific position within DAS, and does not refer to Owner’s, Tenant’s, or other stakeholder’s personnel.
LIGHTING CONTROLS New Construction / Whole Building Update The following may apply to new construction, whole building updates, or as directed by DAS. Generally, when 40% or more of the lighting controls are impacted this section may apply per DAS.
2 Provide metering within relays for branch lighting circuits as directed by DAS Electrical Manager. 3 Emergency warn required. 3.01 Lights shall flash throughout entire building not less than 7 times when a button is pressed or a remote signal is received. Button location per project, per Owner. Remote signal input required. 3.02 This is not a warn-off function, it is a panic/emergency type function
4 Demand response input/controllability for the Lighting Control Network. 5 Provide BacNet Compatible Interface when directed by DAS.
6 Provide Addressable Lighting Controls- every device shall have a unique address. Sensors are not to be integrated into the fixture. 7 Always provide new networked lighting control panel (LCP) for new construction or when not present for existing construction when whole building is updated. Always replace existing LCP/LCPs with new type(s) meeting this standard. 8 Lighting Controls shall be separate from HVAC controls. Separate if existing is tied together/within same controller(s).
Existing Construction / TI & Small Renovations The following only apply to existing construction, small TI, or as directed by DAS. Generally, when less than 40% of the lighting controls are impacted this section may apply as directed by DAS.
9 When replacing existing lighting control panels, the new central panel shall be configurable with 0-10V dimming relays on a one-for-one basis of the existing relay panel. 10 Provide future networkable controls when replacing existing equipment. These controls can stand alone, and must also be networkable so that when the existing building has a lighting controls upgrade these controls do not require replacement.
All Projects The following apply to all project types.
11 Provide as required by current Oregon Energy Specialty Code. 12 Provide as required for Energy Incentives. 13 All equipment shall be listed per Oregon law / rule. 14 Provide occupancy sensors in all areas except those deemed unsafe by the designer. Do not include occupancy sensors in areas where automatic shutoff can endanger occupants (e.g., mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, elevator shafts, etc.). 15 Lighting controls shall require ladder-less programming (programming by pushing a button on/at the device is not permitted, utilize network, Remote controls, Wireless, etc.). Occupants shall not be able to access ladder-less programming options (password protection/special programming remote devices/or other lockout means required). 16 Buildings shall go “dark” after-hours. Interior building lighting shall be programmed for automatic shutoff after business hours, unless otherwise specified by DAS. 17 Systems shall be interconnectable/networkable and be provided by the same manufacturer throughout all of Owner’s & DAS facilities. 18 Provide un switched hot to room controllers. 19 Access to central/exterior/open office/common area lighting interfaces shall be limited to qualified personnel only. Occupants shall not readily access controls interface(s) in areas listed. 19.01 Unless prevented by Code, mount control interface(s) out of reach, right below dropped ceiling. 20 Provide touch-screen lighting interface control as directed by DAS in high-end finished conference/board rooms and/or other areas as directed by DAS. 21 Centrally programmable with option to program within each space via portable application and/or connect to Lighting Control Network through devices within the room (CAT 6 Port on switches/occupancy sensors/etc.). 22 Provide Networkable Room Controllers (and networked power packs) as required. Mount above control panel for open offices. Mount above entrance door in rooms they control, concealed. If hard-ceiling, mount in nearest accessible space. Provide label on ceiling at location installed. Always show these device locations on Record Drawings/As-Built Drawings.
22.01 For example, in a private office, locate controller inside the office above the door to that office.
23 Lighting Controls as a system must be able to have the following functions: 23.01 Time Clock adjustment 23.02 Daylighting Controls 23.03 Dimming 23.04 Distributed Controls 23.05 Emergency Controls 23.06 Occupancy Sensors and Vacancy Sensors 23.07 Photocells 23.08 Relays 23.09 Expandable Relay Panels 23.10 Panel Relays with 0-10V Dimming 23.11 Room Controls 23.12 Addressable
24 Wireless Requirements 24.01 Use only in existing construction. 24.02 Use only where approved by DAS Electrical Manager. 24.03 Use in historical or architecturally significant areas when wiring would be unsightly, cost prohibitive, destroy significant building element(s), and/or cannot be concealed. 24.04 Wireless controls shall utilize a Mesh Network system- ~902 Mhz. 24.05 Batteries shall last not less than 3 years. No battery required with solar or kinetic energy. 24.06 Wireless system shall not be required to operate egress/emergency lighting (wireless fails ON). 24.07 Where wireless system is used, BacNet compatibility is not required. Provide hybrid system for networkability.
25 Fully wireless, fully wired, or a combination of the two within same control system and programming solution is permitted when wireless controls are permitted. 26 Emergency/Egress Light Operation shall be integrated within standard relay/network controls configurations (not a separate Emergency Relay required) and be UL 924 listed.Use CAT 5/5E/6 Wiring only as a network backbone; two-pair/proprietary cable not acceptable as a communications network. 26.01 Interface via standard CAT 5/5E/6 cable. 26.02 Provide Orange Cable for Lighting Controls. 26.03 0-10V DC dimming may use two-wire connections; all else shall be CAT 5/5E/6. 27 Compatible with plug load control. 28 Network Lighting Controls shall not require the Internet to function. Obtain written permission from DAS if Specifier is showing any lighting controls connected to the Internet. This connection requires DAS IT approval, and it shall not be assumed permission will be granted to connect the lighting/controls to any Wide-Area-Network. 29 Occupancy Sensors shall include field configurable shielding options within their shipping packaging. Submit spare/unused shields/box parts to DAS. 30 Factory authorized adjustment programming shall be provided with 6-month post substantial completion return included. 31 Factory training and commissioning shall be included and provided by Substantial Completion.
32 Leviton system, or per DAS Electrical Manager. 33 Per Controls Pre-Approved List.
LIGHTING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1. Lighting shall be LED with a color temperature of 4000K for interior and 5000K for exterior. a. Use of adjustable/tunable color temperature shall be limited to architectural or artistically enhanced areas such as feature walls with art that may be dynamic and require different color temperatures. 2. All fixtures shall be Energy Star rated and/or Energy Trust of Oregon approved with the exception of: a. Specific function LED. b. Historical fixtures. 3. Metal encased fixtures only; do not use plastic or non-metallic enclosed/encased fixtures unless already included in the Pre-Approval list. 4. Follow current code and IES guidelines for lighting levels. a. Provide not less than 35 foot candles for ambient light and ensure 50 foot candles are achievable at desk surface with task lights. b. Provide and Submit Photometric Analysis to DAS. 5. Use of battery packs is only permitted where there is no emergency generator. Self- Contained emergency lighting (aka Bug-Eyes) are not acceptable unless written permission by DAS is obtained. If battery pack is not integral to the fixture, provide a label on the ceiling at battery pack location. All emergency fixtures shall be labeled. a. If Battery packs are approved by DAS, integral battery packs are preferred. Use remote batteries only when fixture manufacturer does not offer or permit a battery pack within the fixture itself. Notify DAS when remote batteries are used and provide labeling as indicated within the Standard/required by DAS labeling requirements. 6. LED Drivers are required to contain Surge Protection Device (SPD) for fixtures exceeding $150 cost or when quantity exceeds 20, 80ft combined total length fixtures of one type are utilized, and/or as directed by DAS. Failure of SPD shall not cause fixture to fail in the event the SPD no longer functions.
7. Not less than 5 year warranty with 7 year preferred. With special written permission by DAS, lighting may carry a 3 year warranty. 8. Not less than 15 year service life unless fixture is custom or in specialized area. A 30 year service life is preferred. Obtain written permission by DAS for any fixture with less than a 15 year service life. 9. Fixtures shall come from factory fully assembled with the exclusion of the mounting and mating hardware. Linear fixtures shall also be factory balanced so they do not tilt when properly mounted. 10. Connect new lighting to existing emergency generator for egress. 11. Provide flexible/configurable lighting for various current and future systems furniture configurations accounting for both general and egress lighting. 12. Re-use existing circuiting to the extent possible. 13. Remote drivers, ballast and the like shall be located in accessible areas preferably above drop ceilings. Conceal in ventilated housing where drop ceiling is not available. Flush for new construction, surface for existing construction. Enclosure style where not concealed shall be approved by architect or DAS. Do not mount in atrium or other areas requiring special access equipment to maintain. 14. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall not fall below 80. Specify highest CRI available unless cost prohibitive.
15. Every interior lighting fixture shall be specified with dimming with lowest level not more than 5%. Dim to 1% is preferred. 16. The Controls Manufacturer shall review / approve the Lighting Control drawings. 17. Approved lighting fixture manufacturers shall have not less than 10 year manufacturing history unless manufacturer is located in Oregon, or as approved by DAS Electrical Manager. 18. Select specification from Pre-Approved fixture list only. a. Pre-listing multiple fixture manufacturers is not acceptable. For example, do not pick a fixture on the Pre-Approved list and then indicate several other manufacturers that make a similar type on the specification unless the other manufacturer’s fixture model also appears on the Pre-Approved list. b. Specification will include “or approved”, and designer/engineer shall review prior to bidding substitutions. Approved substitutions shall also be reviewed/accepted in writing by Owner, DAS, & DAS Electrical Manager. This method is intended for new/unknown fixture types/technology/manufacturers as it is assumed existing fixtures have already been reviewed and/or submitted by the manufacturers to appear on the Pre-Approval list. c. Pre-Approved list of fixtures is for DAS/Designer use only during the design phase; do not indicate “or per pre-approved list”. Instead, always indicate “or approved” on the Specification. 19. Lighting that dims shall utilize 0-10V DC dimming. a. Only specific function LED’s / artistic / historical fixtures are permitted not to use 0- 10V dimming and instead utilize line voltage dimming. Line voltage dimming must be compatible and tested with the existing and/or new lighting controls being installed. Always specify mock-ups for line voltage dimmers and associated fixtures to test compatibility. 20. Linear pendants shall be hung with adjustable aircraft cable and straight cords. Include not less than 18” spare cable adjustment length on each mounting point. Do not use pig-tail curled type connection cords. Cord color shall match ceiling color (white cord when white/light ceiling, black when black/dark/wood ceiling). 0-10V Dimming and any other wiring shall be integral to the power cord provided with the fixture(s) and terminated in the fixture. 21. Include spare fixtures. Type and number of spare fixtures will be determined by DAS on a project by project basis prior to bidding. Specifier shall coordinate number of spares with DAS by providing a general (exact not required) fixture count so number of spare fixtures can be determined.
22. For existing renovations, fixtures shall accommodate power input feeds on either end of fixture. Do not assume linear fixtures can be rotated; egress lighting may be biased to one end or a specific fixture drop location. 23. Exterior Lighting: a. Meet local jurisdictional requirements- i.e. city lighting ordinances. b. Not more than 0.1 foot-candles shall extend beyond property lines unless the neighboring property is owned by DAS. c. Match existing pole heights.
LIGHTING POWER CONNECTIONS 1. Lighting located at, along, and/or within the ceiling may be fed with MC Cable provided the following: a. Homerun to Panel is EMT, terminating through a common J-Box within the same space as the lighting. Common J-box shall be served via EMT. b. MC Cable is not permitted to be routed in -walls or through vertical building elements. c. MC Cable is not permitted to be routed into panelboards.
d. MC Cable is not permitted for receptacles in ceiling, walls, or otherwise. e. Support MC Cable from structure, do not impede access panels. Note: Every tile in a drop ceiling is an access panel. f. Fixture whips must terminate in an accessible J-box mounted to structure; in-line splices are not permitted. g. EMT is required in walls for lighting switches including low voltage switches. EMT is permitted to stub to accessible ceiling space for Low Voltage switches. EMT shall have insulated throats for all connectors including ceiling stubs.
Example Detail, lighting controls not shown (Property of DAS):
2. Fill Raceway per Oregon Electrical Specialty Code % fill requirements. 3. Label every emergency fixture following DAS labeling requirements. 4. Fixtures shall be seismically braced per Code, and Specifications.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Open office areas, conference rooms* off open office areas Linear Fixtures 1. Dust shields. 2. Provide “clips” to ease removal of fixtures. 3. Factory balance every fixture; unbalanced fixtures shall be rejected. 4. Modular LED boards with access to drivers and boards. 5. Configurable in 4-foot increments, up to 16-foot maximum unitary length. a. Individual rows may exceed 16-feet and field mated; however, factory shall not ship single continuous linear fixture exceeding 16-feet. b. Provide power at not less than every 16-foot unitary length (i.e. one power drop for every 16-feet of fixture). More drops are permitted for egress/as needed by control design, less is not acceptable. 6. Configurable end caps – Square, Round, Etc. 7. Multiple circuited for normal and emergency. 8. Direct/Indirect distribution configurable. Use 80% up, 20% down. 20% up, 80% down allowed for special case distribution or where ceiling reflectance falls below 70%. 9. Lensed direct portion. 10. Optional housing colors per specifier.
11. Optically controlled indirect portion. 12. Efficacy not less than 102 Lumens/Watt. 13. Overall fixture efficiency not less than 80%. 14. 0-10V Dimming and any other wiring shall be integral to the power cord provided with the fixture(s) and terminated in the fixture. 15. Per Fixture Pre-Approved List.
Breakout rooms, conference rooms* that make up most of the floor, break rooms, private offices. Tile/Drop Ceiling Locations 1. Basket indirect type fixtures. 2. 2x2 preferred with 2x4 permitted for larger areas or where replacing existing 2x4. 3. Retrofit kits only when existing and new manufacturers are the same and compatible. Kits require written approval by DAS Electrical Manager. 4. Efficacy not less than 116 Lumens/Watt. 5. Overall fixture efficiency not less than 70%. 6. Per Fixture Pre-Approved List.
Hard Lid/Gyp Board Ceiling Locations 1. Recessed linear continuous slot. 2. Continuous new gypsum to integrate fixture; no exposed fixture trim. 3. Downlights along perimeter (in conference rooms where Hard Ceiling/Valance Exists surrounding the drop/tile ceiling) – See Downlights. 4. Downlights throughout (VE Option) – See Downlights. 5. Efficacy not less than 90 Lumens/Watt. 6. Overall Fixture Efficiency not less than 70%. 7. Do not use recessed Can Lights. 8. Per Fixture Pre-Approved List.
* Designer has choice to use linear pendant, 2x2/2x4 recessed basket, recessed notches, and/or downlights in Conference rooms depending upon ceiling type. For example, do not use 2x2 recessed fixtures in hard-lid ceilings. When conference room is located off open office, utilize linear pendant no matter the ceiling type. Always provide perimeter downlights when perimeter ceiling type is different or when art is indicated on ceiling walls.
Storage/Utility Areas 1. Lensed strip light. 2. Dimming not required. 3. Chain hung preferred. 4. Surface mounted along sides of walls where applicable (such as elevator pits). 5. Per Fixture Pre-Approved List.
Downlights in Conference Room perimeters/small areas 1. Surface downlight with multiple trim options, standard in white trim. 2. 6” diameter, 1200 lumen output.
3. UL wet, and damp listed. 4. 0-10V DC Dimming. 5. Standard 4x4 J-Box installation. 6. Less than 0.5 inch projection from ceiling. 7. Do not use recessed Can Lights in hard-ceilings. 8. Per Fixture Pre-Approved List.
Main Entrance- Building Lobby 1. Use High Finished area fixtures per type of ceiling. 2. Hard-Lid ceilings: Per Fixture Pre-Approved List. 3. Tile/Drop ceilings: Per Fixture Pre-Approved List. Exit Signs 1. NFPA & Oregon Specialty Building Code compliant. 2. Not more than 5 Watts consumption. 3. Edge Lit where installed with high-finish fixtures, brushed aluminum face for other areas including open/office areas, corridors, etc. 4. Per Fixture Pre-Approved List. Artistically Architecturally significant Limited areas 1. Per Designer/Architect as approved by DAS.
Enclosed Hallways 1. Provide code required egress lighting. Focus illumination on walls, not on floor. 2. Avoid use of “can” and down light fixtures that pool light on the floor. 3. Unless hallway is utilized for artistry, use fixtures listed for the other areas per the type of ceiling in the hallway. 4. Utilize 90-degree light exiting “volumetric” type fixtures and/or asymmetric fixtures with wall illumination while maintaining egress lighting requirements. 5. Break-out spaces within enclosed hallways shall utilize fixtures that are indicated for the break-out spaces. 6. Do not use recessed Can Lights in hard-ceilings. Exterior Parking Area 1. Fixtures shall not be taller than 25-feet unless area is used for storage and/or zoned industrial. 2. Every fixture/pole to include occupancy sensor; program per Energy Code. Include even if energy code does not require occupancy sensor. If occupancy sensor is not required by Energy Code, program per DAS. 3. Per Fixture Pre-Approved List.
END OF SECTION 16780 DAS LIGHTING STANDARDS
SECTION 16785 DAS PRE – APPROVED LIGHT FIXTURE LIST
TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL Linear Fixtures Phillips Sync Recessed with Tile Ceiling Lithonia RTLED Lithonia BLT ( VE Option) Recessed with Hard Lid/Gyp Fluxwerx Notch Board Ceiling Utility Lithonia CLX Downlight(s) Cooper Halo with UNV 0-10V Dimming High Finish (Main Fluxwerx Notch Entrance Lobbies) Hard- Lid Ceilings High Finish (Main Entrance Mark Architectural Lighting Rubik 2x2 Grayscale Lobbies) with specialized Tile/Drop Ceilings separate control Exit Signs Isolite ELT (Edge Lit- High Finish) Lithonia LQC Pole Fixtures Lithonia Aeris
M Last Update: 06/25/2018
END OF SECTION 16785 DAS PRE – APPROVED LIGHT FIXTURE LIST
Section 16790 DAS PRE- APPROVED LIGHTING CONTROLS
M
TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL Relay Control Panel Leviton GreenMAX RxxTC Remote Low Voltage Leviton GreenMAX RLVxx Cabinet Handheld Display Unit Leviton GreenMAX RHDU1 Network Repeater Leviton GreenMAX NPRPT DRC Smart Pack Leviton GreenMAX DRD07-ED0 Digital Touchscreen Leviton TS007 Digital Switch Leviton GreenMAX RDGSWv Multi-Tech Occupancy Leviton OSCxx P Sensor Photocell Leviton ODC0P Wireless Load Control Leviton 73A00 Module Power Control Module Leviton ZL027 Wireless Occupancy Sensor Leviton WSCxx-IRW Wireless Light Sensor Leviton WSCPC Wireless Remote Switch Leviton ZLDNK
LAST UPDASTED 6-25-18
END OF SECTION 16790 DAS PRE- APPROVED LIGHTING CONTROLS
Section 16795
EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS
All new construction and building modernization projects shall include an (LEVEL 1 EPSS) system.
Minimum time rating of the EPSS shall comply to NFPA 110 4.4.4 (2) CLASS 2
NFPA 110 A.4.4.1 Typically, Level 1 systems are intended to automatically supply illumination or power, or both, to critical areas and equipment in the event of failure of the primary supply or in the event of danger to elements of a system intended to supply, distribute, and control power and illumination essential for safety to human life. Essential electrical systems can provide power for the following essential functions:
1) Life safety illumination 2) Fire detection and alarm systems 3) Elevators 4) Fire pumps 5) Public safety communications systems 6) Industrial processes where current interruption would produce serious life safety or health hazards 7) Essential ventilation and smoke removal systems
END OF SECTION
16795 EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS